Home

2010 Borrego Owner`s Manual

1. Ol BlENIH Sie PASARI 220KPA 32PS EA ES p INFORMAT ION gate cE E E5 resam 220KPA 32PS I TIOELS OHM059052 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEUS ET CHARGE INFORMAT ION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT 2 REAR 5 NOMBRE DE SIEGES TOTAL 7 AVANT ARRIERE 5 ght of cccupants and cargo should never anceeda2 kg or 0 057 Ita Li pals cabine des cccupents at du chargement ne dali Jamals ecbdersz5 by ou 1 157 Ib OONSULTER LE TIRES SIZE 7 COLD TIRE PRESSURE PNEU DIMENSION PRESSION A FROID Seer SSS Maat PSOR 220KPA 32PS FAN cea ose POUR OBTENIR soning POO EIRIB 220KPA 32PS Haathi Ms 5 RENSE GMEMENTS INFORMATION z Sons PASARIB 220KPA 32P51 Hoi i OHM059053N The label located on the driver s door sill gives the original tire size cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight E150101AHM Vehicle capacity weight 525 kg 1157 lbs Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi mum combined weight of occupants and cargo If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer the combined weight includes the tongue load E150102AEN Seating capacity Total 7 persons Front seat 2 persons Rear seat 5 persons Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver your vehicle may carry However the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occup
2. Side impact air bag if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a side impact air bag in each front seat The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle s driver and or the front passen ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone Safety features of your vehicle The side impact air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions depending on the crash severity angle speed and point of impact The side impact air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side Also both sides of the side impact air bags deploy in certain rollover situa tions The side impact air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations afety features of your vehicle 4 Ve fd I 7 OUN026091 Curtain air bag if equipped Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in cer tain side impact collisions The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact colli sions depending on the crash severity angle speed and point of impact The curtain air bags do not only deploy on the side of the impact but also on the opposite side Also the both sides of the curtain air bags deploy in certain rollover situa tions
3. C040300AHM Occupant detection system Your vehicle is equipped with an occu pant detection system in the front pas senger s seat The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly seated front passenger and determine if the passenger s front air bag should be enabled may inflate or not The driver s front air bag is not affected or controlled by the occupant detection system Safety features of your vehicle C040302AHM Main components of occupant detec tion system e A detection device located within the front passenger seat track e Electronic system to determine whether passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated A indicator light located on the instru ment panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicat ing passenger air bag system is deacti vated e The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with the occu pant detection system If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system determines to be of adult size and he she sits properly sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs com fortably extended and their feet on the floor the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator will turn off and the front pas senger s air bag will be able to inflate if necessary in frontal crashes You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG O
4. 2 This switch is used to open the REAR monitor 1 This switch is used to eject the DISC 3 This switch is used to constantly light from the REAR DVDP DECK up the vehicle interior regardless of whether the doors are open or closed 2 No message is displayed when operat ing a mode other than the DVDP mode in the REAR system A message stat ing to eject the DISC will be displayed when in DVDP mode 4 A receiver is installed within the Remote Control 5 A device which transmits signals to the infrared wireless headset is installed Features of your vehicle 2 This is used to make volume adjust Rear Wireless Headset Rear Panel A POWER CEEELELLES ENTER PUSH 9 Toro o o o VOLUME CAUTION The power button and volume are positioned at the left side of the headset Wearing the headset with the left and right side reversed may reduce sound quality and recep tion Check to see that the headsets are properly worn 1 This is used to turn the power on off ments h 4 The MODE operating on the REAR system is displayed Used to turn the power on off or adjust the volume for the speaker Used to display the menu for the mode currently operating on the REAR sys tem Used to make screen adjustments for the mode currently operating on the REAR system 5 Used to change to a different mode on the REAR system Pressing this button will display a scr
5. Used to move the select area upwards 10 Used to move the select area left wards 11 Used to move the select area right wards 12 Used to move the selected area downwards 13 14 19 20 21 Used to select the button within the selected area Used to operate the SEEK or TRACK selection function in accordance to the currently playing AV mode Used to operate the TUNE or FF REW functions for the current AV mode Used to make screen settings for the mode currently operating on the Rear system Used to pause or replay the current file on the Rear system The play pause function will not operate in the REAR system during CDC mode Used to mute the REAR speaker The rear speakers can be muted when lis tening through the rear headsets Used to set the DVD menu Used to change the DVD AUDIO lan guage Used to change the DVD SUBTITLE a ante yl Features of your vehicle Operating the Rear RSE System Starting the System 1 Position the ignition key onto ACC or ON 2 If the Push Power button or the PWR button on the remote control is pressed the AV system will turn on and display the most recently operated mode EX turning on the system will display FM1 radio mode if the last operated mode prior to turning off the system had been FM1 radio FM 1 BAND IS rr O 87 707 Turning Off the System 1 If the Push Power button or the PWR b
6. Do not misuse or abuse the engine Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods 5 minutes or more Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control sys tem All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized KIA dealer Avoid driving with a very low fuel level If you run out of gasoline it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle Additionally such actions could void your warranties See oeee J Dimensions 8 2 Bulb wattage 8 2 Tires and wheels 8 3 Recommended lubricants and capacities 8 4 Vehicle identification number VIN 8 6 Vehicle certification label 8 6 Tire specification and pressure label 8 7 Engine number 8 7 Specifications amp Consumer information 8 Specifications amp Consumer information DIMENSIONS 1010000BHM EU 1765 69 5 1810 71 3 Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase 1 with trailer hitch 2 with roof rack 3 with P245 70R17 tire 4 with P265 60R18 tire BULB WATTAGE lO30000AHM EU Light Bulb Headlights Low Headlights High Front turn signal lights Position
7. Driving your vehicle BEFORE DRIVING E020100AUN e Be sure that all lights work Before entering vehicle e Check all gauges e Be sure that all windows outside mir Check the operation of warning lights ror s and outside lights are clean when the ignition switch is turned to e Check the condition of the tires the ON position e Check under the vehicle for any signof Release the parking brake and make leaks sure the brake warning light goes out e Be sure there are no obstacles behind For safe operation be sure you are famil you if you intend to back up iar with your vehicle and its equipment E020200AUN Necessary inspections Fluid levels such as engine oil engine coolant brake fluid and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis with the exact interval depending on the fluid Further details are provided in sec tion 7 Maintenance E020300BUN Before starting e Close and lock all doors e Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached e Adjust the inside and outside rearview mirrors See ee eee Driving your vehicle KEY POSITIONS E030100AHM Illuminated ignition switch Whenever a front door is opened the ignition switch will illuminate for your con venience provided the ignition switch is not in the ON position The light will go off immediately when the ignition switch is turned on It will also go off after about 30 seconds when the door is clo
8. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg 150 pounds Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a par ticular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommend ed tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seat ed Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow ban
9. OHM048210 E 3rd row OHM048115 Features of your vehicle OHM048116 Rear vents The vent can be adjusted by rotating the blade x NOTICE If all the vents are closed it may cause some noise Always have more than 2 vents opened OHM048117 D230202AHM Rear temperature control To change the air temperature in the rear passenger compartment pull up A the switch for warm and hot air H or push down the switch for cooler air C D230203AHM Rear fan speed control To change the fan speed pull up A the switch for higher speed or push down V the switch for lower speed To turn the fan speed control off press the rear blower ON OFF button indica tor light is not illuminated Features of your vehicle System operation D230501AUN Ventilation 1 Set the mode to the position 2 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed D230502AHM Heating 1 Set the mode to the position 2 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed 5 If dehumidified heating is desired turn the air conditioning system if equipped on e If the windshield fogs up set the mode to the lt 8 or W position Operation T
10. Ol_ HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL A010000AHM We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehi cle Your Owner s Manual can assist you in many ways We strongly recommend that you read the entire manual In order to minimize the chance of death or injury you must read the WARNING and CAU TION sections in the manual Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle By reading your manual you will learn about features important safety information and driving tips under vari ous road conditions The general layout of the manual is pro vided in the Table of Contents Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual Sections This manual has eight sections plus an index Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want You will find various WARNINGs CAUTIONs and NOTICEs in this manu al These WARNINGs were prepared to enhance your personal safety You should carefully read and follow ALL procedures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGS CAUTIONS and NOTICES A CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution Is ignored NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or help ful information is being provided Introduction FUEL REQ
11. The buzzer sounds 10 times if the mem ory system malfunctions Have the driv er position memory system checked by an authorized KIA dealer Storing positions into memory using the buttons on the door D120101AHM EE Storing driver s seat positions 1 Shift the transmission shift lever into P Park while the ignition switch is ON 2 Adjust the driver seat outside rearview mirror and steering wheel to positions comfortable to the driver 3 Press the SET button on the control panel The system will beep once 4 Press one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button The system will beep twice when the memory has been suc cessfully stored D120102AHM EE Recalling positions from memory Shift the transmisson shift lever into P Park under one of the followings e The ignition switch is ON e The drivers door is opened while the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position e Within 30 seconds after the driver s door is closed while the ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC position 2 To recall the position in memory press the desired memory button 1 or 2 The system will beep once then the driver seat outside rearview mirror and steering wheel will automatically adjust to the stored positions Adjusting one of the control switches for the driver seat outside rearview mirror and steering wheel while the system is recalling the stored positions will cause the m
12. Z C1 i OHM048001 D040000AHM With a smart key you can lock or unlock a door and tailgate and even start the engine without inserting the key The functions of the buttons on a smart key are similar to the remote keyless entry Refer to the Remote keyless entry in this section D040100AHM Smart key functions Carrying the smart key you may lock and unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate Also you may start the engine Refer to the following for more details OHM048002 D040101BHM Locking Pressing the button of the front outside door handles with all doors and tailgate closed and any door unlocked locks all the doors and tailgate The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds once to indicate that all doors and tailgate are locked The button will only operate when the smart key is with in 28 in 0 7 m from the outside door handle If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside door handle Even though you press the button the doors will not lock and the chime sounds 3 times if any of the following occurs e The smart key is in the vehicle e The ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC or ON position e Any door except the tailgate is opened D040102AHM EU Unlocking Pressing the buttons in the drivers out side door handle with all doors and tail gate closed and locked unlocks the dri
13. sym trouble free use however it can bol faces up as indicated in the illus malfunction if exposed to mois tration ture or static electricity If you are 3 Install the battery in the reverse order unsure how to use or replace the of removal battery contact an authorized KIA dealer Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter or smart key to malfunction Be sure to use the correct battery To avoid damaging the transmit ter or smart key don t drop it get it wet or expose it to heat or sun light An inappropriately disposed bat tery can be harmful to the envi ronment and human health Dispose the battery according to Si ESS0ne your local law s or regulation OEN046004 E Type C D020300BHM Battery replacement A battery should last for several years but if the transmitter or smart key is not working properly try replacing the bat tery with a new one If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery contact an authorized KIA dealer Features of your vehicle THEFT ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED DO30000AEN This system is designed to provide pro tection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle This system is operated in three stages the first is the Armed stage the second is the Theft alarm stage and the third is the Disarmed stage If trig gered the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights D030100AHM EU Armed stage Park the vehicle
14. Armrest 2nd row seat To use the armrest pull the strap 1 for ward from the seatback Cup holder To use the cup holder push the button 2 Close the cover after use OHMO038021 C010305AHM Seat warmer 2nd row if equipped The seat warmers are provided to warm the rear seats during cold weather With the ignition switch in the ON position push either of the switches to warm the left or right side of the seat During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed keep the switches in the OFF state e The seat warmer defaults to the OFF state whenever the ignition switch is turned on NOTICE With the seat warmer switch in the ON state the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature J CAUTION e When cleaning the seats do not use an organic solvent such as thinner benzene alcohol and gasoline Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats e To prevent overheating the seat warmer do not place blankets cushions or seat covers on the seats while the seat warmer Is in operation e Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers Damage to the seat warming components could occur e Always turn off the seat warmer when not in use Safety features of your vehicle C010307AHM Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks can be folded to facil itate carrying long items o
15. MUTE is displayed on the LCD e Rotate AUDIO Hierarchy 2 is dis played e Hierarchy 4 e Press AUDIO to select the FADER control mode e Rotate AUDIO to adjust the FADER level If AUDIO is not pressed rotated for 5 seconds after adjusting the display e Hierarchy 5 automatically returns to normal mode Another adjusting mode can be used for same operation To Select SIRIUS DISPLAY mode If CAT CH or ART TITLE is selected in the SIRIUS DISPLAY mode selected mode will be displayed basically and another display mode will be displayed for 3 seconds automatically once Features of your vehicle CDP 1 CD Loading SLOT 2 CD Eject Button 9 3 RANDOM Play Button a 4 Automatic Track Selection Button 5 REPEAT Play Button i 6 SCROLL Play Button erre 7 CD Indicator f 8 CD Selection Button TRACK A 9 SCAN Play Button i T 10 Track File Search Knob and ENTER a Button 11 Folder search Button 12 INFORMATION Button A 200HMU ny el Features of your vehicle CD CHANGER E Type A CD Loading Slot CD Eject Button RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button SCROLL Play Button CD Indicator CD Selection Button SCAN Play Button 0 Track File Search Knob and ENTER Button Guse LOAD sail co AUX USB8 O0 O ON OOF WN gt A CAT OOGO 4 ia 11 Folder s
16. Rear window defroster button NO of WD E Type C Fan speed control switch Front blower ON OFF button Mode selection knob Air conditioning button Temperature control switch Recirculated air position button Outside fresh air position button Front wiper deicer button Rear window defroster button O oOo NOoOO ARA ON OHM049234L OHM049088 Features of your vehicle D230100AEN Heating and air conditioning 1 Start the engine 2 Set the mode to the desired position For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling Heating Nad Cooling a 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 5 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed 6 If air conditioning is desired turn the air conditioning system if equipped on OHM048090N Features of your vehicle OHM049089 D230101AHM Mode selection The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the venti lation system Air can be directed to the floor dash board outlets or windshield Six symbols are used to represent MAX A C Face Bi Level Floor Floor Defrost and Defrost air position The MAX A C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster MAX A C Level B C D E F Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face In this mode the air conditioning and the recirculated air posi
17. direction key on the REAR panel or the Remote Control to display the select area and move it to the PRESET but ton desired for storing 2 After positioning the select area to the PRESET button desired for storing press the select key on the JOYSTICK of the REAR panel or the select key on the Remote Control for over 0 8 sec onds to store the current station 107 9 MHz x NOTICE The SCAN function which automatical ly searches for broadcast stations with superior reception is only supported by the FRONT system Using the SCAN function through the FRONT system will apply the same settings in the REAR system a nt yal Features of your vehicle SIRIUS satellite radio mode Starting SIRIUS mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display a screen allowing the 6 modes of FM AM SIRIUS CDC AUX DVDP to be selected 2 While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the cursor to SIRLUS mode and press the joystick key to enter SIRIUS mode 3 The selected SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIR IUS3 mode screen will be displayed Select the desired broadcast station to begin listening SIRIUSH 1 F amp 3 dl 021 THE SPECTRUM JAZZ amp POP THE CARPAL TUNNEL OF LOVE Starting SIRIUS mode by use of Rear remote control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the SIRIUS key on the Rear Remote Control will display the most recently operated SIR
18. functions in other electronic sys tems or devices used in your vehicle Do not use broken electric acces sories or equipment as they may damage the AC inverter and vehi cle s electrical system CAUTION e When not using the AC inverter make sure that the switch is turned off and is closed the AC inverter cover Only use the AC inverter when the engine is running and remove the plug from the AC inverter after using the accessory Using when the engine is not running or leav ing the accessory plugged in for a long time may cause the battery to discharge Do not use electric accessories or equipment with maximum elec tric power consumption greater than 150W 115VAC Continued Do not use two or more electric accessories or equipment at the same time When input voltage is under 11V the outlet LED and indicator will blink and will automatically turn off Features of your vehicle D280600AEN Digital clock Whenever the battery terminals or relat ed fuses are disconnected you must reset the time When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position the clock buttons operate as follows Me CICI CIL m G a A n G a E lt OHM048136 D280601AHM Hour 1 Pressing the H button will advance the time displayed by one hour D280602AHM Minute 2 Pressing the M button will advance the time displayed by one minute D280603AHM Reset 3 To clear away minutes press the
19. ging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger com partment may become stale In addition prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessive ly dry air in the passenger compart ment UUUULBUUD OHM048095 D230104AHM Fan speed control The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation The fan speed switch allows you to con trol the fan speed of the air flow from the ventilation system To change the fan speed pull up A the switch for higher speed or push down the switch for lower speed To turn the fan speed control off press the front blower ON OFF button the indicator light is not illuminated Features of your vehicle OHM048096N D230105AHM Air conditioning if equipped Press the A C button to turn the air con ditioning system on indicator light will illuminate Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off Features of your vehicle E Front EAL OHM048159 D230200AHM EE Rear heating and air conditioning if equipped To turn on the rear climate control sys tem oh 2 3 Press the rear blower ON OFF button located on the front and rear climate control panel indicator light will illumi nate Operating the fan speed switch will also turn on the rear climate control system Set the fan speed to the desired speed wit
20. or press the left side button 4 for cooler air C m Type B C pDOOOCOCOOD OHM048093 Type B C Pull up A the switch for warm and hot air H or push down the switch for cool er air C Features of your vehicle Outside temperature conversion You can switch the temperature mode between Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol lows While pressing the air intake control recirculated air position button press down the temperature control switch for 3 seconds or more The display will change from Fahrenheit to Centigrade or from Centigrade to Fahrenheit If the battery has been discharged or disconnected the temperature mode dis play will reset to Centigrade D230103AHM Air intake control The air intake control is used to select the outside fresh air position or recircu lated air position To change the air intake control position press the control button Recirculated air position With the recirculated air position selected air from the passenger compart ment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected Outside fresh air position With the outside fresh air position selected air enters the vehicle from out 1 side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected x NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position without air conditioning selected may cause fog
21. vert to full automatic control of the sys tem SESE wle lens OHM048104 D240201AHM Mode selection The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the venti lation system The air flow outlet port is converted as follows PH Xa e nd e NG Refer to the illustration in the Manual cli mate control system Face Level B C D E F Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face Additionally each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet Bi Level B D E C F Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor Floor Level C A D E Most of the air flow is directed to the floor with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side win dow defrosters Floor Defrost Level A C D E Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters See ae Gece Features of your vehicle OHM048105 Defrost Level A D Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters TELLET iga OHM048092N Instrument panel vents The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel Also you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown OHM048106 D240202AHM EC Temperature control The temperatur
22. with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manu factured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of seri ous injury or death Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming It is also sug gested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes Programming HomeLink NOTICE When programming a garage door opener it is advised to park the vehi cle outside of the garage It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmit ter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Some vehicles may require the igni tion switch to be turned to the second or accessories position for pro gramming and or operation of HomeLink In the event that there are still pro gramming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Seca cece dl Features of your vehicle Standard programming To
23. 0 8 second to activate FLD RPT mode RPT Only a file is played repeatedly e FLD RPT Only files in a folder are played repeatedly 4 SCROLL Play Button File names are scrolled for 5 seconds on the display 5 USB AUX Selection Button e If auxiliary device USB is connected it turns to USB AUX mode and toggles as below when the button is pressed each time AUX USB AUX USB AUX If no auxiliary device and USB is con nected it displays No Media for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode 6 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the current CD TRACK FILE as below when the button is pressed each time FILE NAME TITLE ARTIST ALBUM FOLDER NAME TOTAL FILE 7 File Search Knob and ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to display File name after the current song e Turn this knob counterclockwise to dis play File Name before the current song e To select the displayed song press the button 8 FOLDER Search Button e Folder name File name the first song in the folder is moved up or down from currently playing folder e To select the displayed folder press ENTER NO 6 button 9 SCAN Play Button Plays back the first 10 seconds of each song in the USB memory a ena ey eal Features of your vehicle How to Activate iPod Device 1 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate s2 mode and more than 0 8 second to activate
24. 1 Upon first playing a DVD title a menu screen will become displayed after the initialization video While playing press the menu button the AV MENU button on the REAR panel or the AV MENU button on the Remote Control to display the semi transparent AV MENU at the top of the screen 2 Select the desired menu by using the up down amp left right direction keys or the 4 direction joystick keys on the Rear Panel or the 4 direction keys on the Remote Control and press ENTER ype SRECABFERU E a NOTICE The menu will operate only in support ed DVD titles Features of your vehicle USB mode x NOTICE iPod mode Refer to the MP3 mode section in iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc Starting USB mode by use of Rear Chapter 5 for additional USB related panel operational instructions Starting iPod mode by use of Rear 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel panel to display the MODE selection 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR screen panel to display the MODE selection screen 2 lf the key on the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is 2 If the key on the joystick located at the moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode Select the AUX mode button Select the MUSIC button on the AUX mode screen 5 The USB will begin playing USB music i im POP f Beyonce Knowles Deja Vu ma far right side
25. 10 C 14 F the power steering may require increased effort when the engine is first started This is caused by increased fluid viscosity due to the cold weather and does not indicate a mal function When this happens increase the engine RPM by depressing the accelerator until the RPM reaches 1 500 rpm then release or let the engine idle for two or three minutes to warm up the fluid D130300AEN Tilt steering Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive while permitting you to see the instru ment panel warning lights and gauges Se ae ee eevee a Features of your vehicle D130301AHM Manual type if equipped To change the steering wheel angle adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle 2 while pulling the lock release lever 1 and then release the lock release lever to lock the steering wheel in place Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driv ing D130302AHM EE Electric type if equipped Adjust the steering wheel angle 2 and position 3 with the control switch 1 Never adjust the position of the steering wheel while driving OHM048036N D130500AUN Horn To sound the horn press the horn sym bol on your steering wheel Check the horn regularly to be s
26. Bird droppings are high ly corrosive and may damage painted Surfaces in just a few hours Always remove bird droppings as soon as possi ble Don t neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corrosion Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry Use particular care if you carry fertilizers cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried See eee Maintenance e Interior care G230201BHM Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per fume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause damage or discoloration If they do con tact the dashboard wipe them off imme diately See the instructions for the prop er way to clean vinyl J CAUTION Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical electronic components inside the vehicle as this may dam age them J CAUTION When cleaning leather products steering wheel seats etc use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid alkaline detergents the color of the leather may fade or the sur face may get stripped off G230202AUN Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a w
27. DISC key on the remote control will not begin mode operation Features of your vehicle CD Changer mode menu screen con figuration 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is CDC mode 2 CD Changer info display The operational status of the CDC changer is displayed 3 DISC select button The disc status is displayed 4 BACK This button will remain inactive if the DISC is not properly playing When in proper playing state pressing this button will dis play the DISC mode of the CD Changer Features of your vehicle CD mode Starting CD mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display the MODE selection screen 2 lf the 4 direction joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode 3 While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the cursor to CDC DVDP mode and press the joystick key to enter 4 If the CDC mode is selected the DISC selection screen displaying the No 1 6 DISC becomes displayed If the DVDP mode is selected the CD already inserted in the DVD PLAYER will begin playing 5 When in CDC mode use the 4 direc tion joystick to move to the select area of the DISC where the CD has been inserted and press the joystick key to begin playing Starting CD mode by use of Rear remote
28. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 If your vehicle will be towing a trail er load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle O Driving your vehicle Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Vehicle A Vehicle Vehicle FA Fa C C it Capacity oy oy apacity apacity A B C C C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg A Vehicle Capacity 635 kg Weight 1400 Ibs Weight 1400 Ibs Weight 1400 Ibs Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Weight Weight Weight 68 kg 150 Ibs x 2 68 kg 150 lbs x 5 78 kg 172 lbs x 5 Available Cargo and 499 kg Available Cargo and 295 kg c Available Cargo and 245 kg Luggage weight 1100 Ibs Luggage weight 650 Ibs Luggage weight 540 Ibs Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific informa tion about your vehicle s capacity weight and seating positions The com bined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle s capacity weight Driving your vehicle GWIR PAINT TRIM GAWR TIRES RIMS COLD TIRE INFL FRONT REAR THIS VEHICLE CONF MOTOR ET IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUF
29. If this message is displayed it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal is not available Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky Features of your vehicle BLUETOOTH PHONE OPERATION General Feature e This system supports Bluetooth a wire less system that allows you to make or receive calls without taking your hands from the steering wheel and without using cables to connect the phone and system Bluetooth Volume e The phone must be paired to the system before using the hands free feature Only one linked cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The System is available in English US Spanish or Canadian French languages A CAUTION If the vehicle is moving do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth phone NOTICE Operation Button perfect compatibility with this system Some Bluetooth devices do not offer a m Voice Recognition Activation e The voice recognition engine contained in the Bluetooth System can be activat ed in the following conditions Button Activation The voice recognition system will be active when the button is pressed and after the sound of a Beep Active Listening The voice recognition system will be active for a period of time when the Voice Recognition system has asked for a customer response e The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine while number greater than ten will
30. W OHM048046L Gauges D150201AHM Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forward speed of the vehicle The speedometer is calibrated in kilome ters per hour and or miles per hour OHM048047N D150202AHM Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi mate number of engine revolutions per minute rpm Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and or over revving the engine Sec ace ecre dl Features of your vehicle When the door is opened or if the engine m Type A m Type B is not started within 1 minute the tachometer pointer may move slightly in the ON position with the engine OFF Vly This movement is normal and will not His affect the accuracy of the tachometer H l once the engine is running A CAUTION Do not operate the engine within the tachometer s RED ZONE This may cause severe engine dam age D150203AUN Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch is ON Do not continue driving with an overheat ed engine If your vehicle overheats refer to If the engine overheats in section 6 OHM048048 CAUTION If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the H position it indicates overheat ing that may damage the engine Features of your vehicle i RESET ff TRIP CAUTION Avoid driving with a very low fuel level Running out of fuel co
31. air position will be selected automatically If the Y position is selected lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed Features of your vehicle D250300AHM Defogging logic To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield the air intake or air conditioning are controlled auto matically according to certain conditions suchas or WY position To cancel or return to the defogging logic do the fol lowing OHM048123L D250301 AHM EE Manual climate control system 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position WY 3 Press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0 5 second of interval It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the pro grammed status If the battery has been discharged or dis connected it resets to the defog logic status 3 mah a a 24L D250302AHM EE Automatic climate control system 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Select the defroster position pressing the defroster button WY 3 While pressing the air conditioning button A C press the air intake con trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec onds The A C display blinks 3 times with 0 5 second of interval It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned
32. any reason make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter rim width and offset G200800AHM Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear Slow down whenever there is rain snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing con trol of the vehicle G200900AUN Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear If you find a tire is worn unevenly have your dealer check the wheel alignment When you have new tires installed make sure they are balanced This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life Additionally a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel Maintenance e I1030B04JM G201000AUN Tire sidewall labeling This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number TIN for safety standard certification The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall G201001AUN 1 Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown G201002AHM 2 Tire size designation A tire s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation You will need this information when selecting replace ment tires for your vehicle The fol lowing explai
33. armed e A front or rear door is opened without using the transmitter or smart key or ignition key The tailgate is opened without using the transmitter or smart key or igni tion key e The engine hood is opened The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 30 seconds and repeat the horn 3 times unless the system is disarmed To turn off the system unlock the doors with the transmitter or smart key or ignition key D030400BHM EU Disarmed stage The system will be disarmed when Ignition key The door is opened with the ignition key Transmitter The door unlock button is pressed The tailgate unlock button is pressed Smart key The door unlock button is pressed The button of the front outside door is pressed while carrying the smart key The tailgate unlock button is pressed The tailgate is opened while carrying the smart key The door is opened with the mechani cal key After the doors are unlocked the hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed After pressing the unlock button if any door or tailgate is not opened within 30 seconds the system will be rearmed NOTICE If you lose your keys consult your authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION Do not change alter or adjust the theft alarm system because it could cause the theft alarm system to malfunction and should only be serviced by an author
34. device Press and hold the trained HomeLink button The device has the rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rap idly and then turns solid after 2 sec onds To train rolling code devices follow these instructions 1 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand If there is difficulty locating the training button reference the device owner s manual or please visit our Web site at www homelink com 2 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button which activates the training light x NOTICE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 3 3 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and then release the desired HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence a second time to complete the program ming Some devices may require you to repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate 5 TOo program the remaining two HomeLink buttons follow either steps 1 through 4 above for other Rolling Code devices or steps 2 through
35. for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels If in doubt consult an author ized KIA dealer What to do in an emergency F070301 AHM EC Important use of compact spare tire if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a com pact spare tire This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regu lar size tire This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only To prevent the jack jack handle wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire A CAUTION from rattling while the vehicle is in i motion store them properly e You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity The operation of this vehicle NOTICE is not recommended with Check the inflation pressure after more than one compact spare installing the spare tire Adjust it to tire in use at the same time the specified pressure as necessary The compact spare should be inflat ed to 420 kPa 60 psi What to do in an emergency When using a compact spare tire observe the following precautions Under no circumstances should you exceed 80 km h 50 mph a higher speed could damage the tire Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards Any road hazard such as a pothole or debris could seriously damage the compact spare Any continuous road use of thi
36. paint thinner or other solvents on or near them G180200AUN Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade quately the blades may be worn or cracked and require replacement A CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components do not attempt to move the wipers manual ly CAUTION The use of a non specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunc tion and failure Maintenance aae gt N OHM078059 Ni OHM078060 OHMO078061 G180201AHM 2 Lift up the wiper blade clip Then pull 3 Install the new blade assembly in the Front windshield wiper blade down the blade assembly and remove reverse order of removal 1 Raise the wiper arm it A CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield since it may chip or crack the windshield Maintenance OEDO076041 G180202AHM 2 Install the new blade assembly by Rear window wiper blade inserting the center part into the slot in 1 Raise the wiper arm and pull out the the wiper arm until it clicks into place wiper blade assembly 3 Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slight ly To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components have an authorized KIA dealer replace the wiper blade Maintenance BATTERY G190100BHM For best battery service e Keep the battery securely mounted e Keep the battery top clean and dry e Keep the terminals and connections c
37. procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended For trailer towing guidelines information refer to Trailer towing in section 5 On full time 4WD vehicles your vehicle must be towed with a wheel lift and dol lies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground A CAUTION The full time 4WD vehicle should never be towed with the wheels on the ground This can cause serious damage to the transmission or the 4WD system On 2WD or part time 4WD 2H position vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehi cle with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground If any of the loaded wheels or suspen sion components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground use a towing dolly under the rear wheels When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used the rear of the vehicle should always be lift ed not the front OHM068018 CAUTION Do not tow with sling type equip ment Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment Do not tow the vehicle forward with the rear wheels on the ground as this may cause dam age to the vehicle What to do in an emergenc When towing your vehicle in an emer gency without wheel dollies 1 Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi tion 2 Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral 3 For part time 4WD
38. vers door The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds twice to indi cate that the driver s door is unlocked All doors and tailgate are unlocked if the button is pressed once more within 4 seconds The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound twice to indicate that all the doors and tailgate are unlocked Pressing the button in the front passen ger s outside door handle with all doors and tailgate closed and locked unlocks all the doors and tailgate The hazard warning lights blink and the chime sounds twice to indicate that all doors and tailgate are unlocked The button will only operate when the smart key is within 28 40 in 0 7 1 m from the out side door handle See ee oe cel Features of your vehicle When the smart key is recognized in the area of 28 40 in 0 7 1 m from the front outside door handle other people can also open the door without possession of the smart key D040103AHM Tailgate unlocking If you are within 0 7 m 28 in from the outside tailgate handle with your smart key in possession the tailgate will unlock and open when you press the tailgate handle switch The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked Also once the tailgate is opened and then closed the tailgate will lock auto matically D040104AHM Start up You can start the engine without inserting the key For detailed information refer to Starting
39. 10 amps with the engine running J CAUTION e Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use Using the accessory plug for pro longed periods of time with the engine off could cause the bat tery to discharge Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in elec tric capacity Adjust the air conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet e Close the cover when not in use Continued Continued e Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle s power outlet These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle OHM048228N D281300AHM AC inverter if equipped The AC inverter supplies 115VAC 150W electric power to operate electric acces sories or equipment when the ignition switch is in the ON position or engine is running See ace Gece Features of your vehicle The AC inverter is turned on by pushing in the switch To turn the AC inverter off push the switch a second time x NOTICE When pushing the AC inverter switch the switch indicator illumination is delayed momentarily while the system conducts a self check Continued e Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the AC invert er These devices may cause excessive audio noise and mal
40. 5 in Standard Programming for standard devices Features of your vehicle Gate operator amp Canadian program ming During programming your handheld transmitter may automatically stop trans mitting Continue to press the Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System but ton note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard Programming portion of this document while you press and re press cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after sever al seconds upon successful training Operating HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc For con venience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a new device to a previously trained HomeLink button follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release until step 4 has been completed 2 When the indicator light begins to flash slowly after 20 seconds position the handheld transmitter 2 to 8 cm 1 to 3 inches away from the HomeLink sur face 3 Press and hold the handheld transmit ter button The HomeLink indicator light will flash first slowly and then rap i
41. AUX Selection Button e If auxiliary device USB is connected it turns to USB AUX mode and toggles as below when the button is pressed each time AUX USB AUX USBAUX e If no auxiliary device and USB is con nected it displays No Media for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode 5 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the current CD TRACK FILE as below when the button is pressed each time File Name Title Artist Album Folder Name Total File not dis played if the file has no song 6 File Search Knob and ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to display File name after the current song e Turn this knob counterclockwise to dis play File Name before the current song e To select the displayed song press the button 7 FOLDER Search Button e Folder name File name the first song in the folder is moved up or down from currently playing folder e To select the displayed folder press ENTER NO 6 button 8 SCAN Play Button Plays back the first 10 seconds of each song in the USB memory Features of your vehicle How to Activate iPod Device 1 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate s gt mode and more than 0 8 second to activate gt mode e g gt All songs in the current catego ry are played in random e 3 An album in the iPod is selected in random and is played in the order of the songs in the album 2 Automati
42. Activate RADIO SET UP VOLUME Control 1 FM AM Selection Button The FM AM button toggles between FM and AM Listed below are the paths as the system switches from FM to AM and back to FM e FM AM FM1 FM2 AMFM1 e FM FM1 FM2 FM1 2 Power ON OFF Button amp Volume Control Knob e Turns the audio system on off when the ignition switch is on ACC or ON e f the knob is turned clockwise counter clockwise the volume will increase decrease 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button e When the TRACK V is pressed it will automatically tune to the next lower station When the SEEK is pressed it will automatically tune to the next higher station 4 SCAN Selection Button e When the button is pressed it auto matically scans the radio stations upwards e The SCAN feature steps through each Station starting from the initial station for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel 5 Preset Selection Button e Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec ond to play the station saved in each button Press 1 6 button more than 0 8 sec ond or longer to save the current station to the respective button with a beep 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob If the Knob is turned clockwise counter clockwise the frequency will increase decrease AM 10kHz FM 200kHz m Audio Setup MODE Press and Rotate AUDIO repeatedly to choose the
43. Button File Search Knob and ENTER Button FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button SCAN Selection Button cD AUX US8 rum AUOIO CONTROL A CAT FOLDER w o N O oa A W PP A 300HMU E ey eal Features of your vehicle E Type C o_o RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button SCROLL Play Button USB AUX iPod Selection Button INFORMATION Button File Search Knob and ENTER Button FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button SCAN Selection Button CD AUX RS ODON SE O CONTROL A A 1 pisc 2 ROM 3 scrou SCAN CAT FOLDER v Oo O N O oa A W PP A 350HMU Features of your vehicle How to activate USB MEMORY 1 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RDM mode and more than 0 8 second to activate ALL RDM mode e RDM Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence e ALL RDM All files ina USB memory are played back in random sequence 2 Automatic Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current file Press again within 1 seconds to return the previous file e Press and hold TRACK V to initiate rewind search Press SEEK for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance the next file Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 3 REPEAT Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RPT mode and more than
44. DBC indicator will blink to indicate the DBC is operating Type B The white DBC indicator will illuminate when the DBC button is pressed and the system is on When driving down a steep hill at a speed under 35 km h 22 mph the DBC will operate and the yellow DBC indicator will illuminate to indicate the DBC is operating If the red indicator illuminates the DBC system may have malfunctioned Take your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked D150325AHM Cruise indicators if equipped CRUISE indicator CRUISE The indicator light illuminates when the cruise control system is enabled The cruise indicator light in the instru ment cluster is illuminated when the cruise control ON OFF switch on the steering wheel is pulled or pushed The indicator light goes off when the cruise control ON OFF switch is pulled again For more information about the use of cruise control refer to Cruise control system in section 5 Cruise SET indicator SET The indicator light illuminates when the cruise function switch SET or RES is ON The cruise SET indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control switch SET or RES is pushed The cruise SET indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control switch CANCEL is pushed or the system is disengaged D150327AUN Key reminder warning chime if equipped If the driver s door is opened while the i
45. Driving your vehicle E120800AHM Don t let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze apply it only temporar ily while you put the gear shift lever in P Park and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll Then release the parking brake E120900AHM Don t let ice and snow accumu late underneath Under some conditions snow and ice can build up under the fenders and inter fere with the steering When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed E121000ASA EC Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weath er you should carry appropriate emer gency equipment Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains flashlight emergency flares sand shovel jumper cables window scraper gloves ground cloth coveralls blanket etc Driving your vehicle TRAILER TOWING E140000AHM EC If you are considering towing with your vehicle you should first check with your Country s Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements Since laws vary from province to pro
46. E85 is not compatible with your vehicle Use of E85 may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle s engine and fuel system KIA recommends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceed ing 10 percent CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel system or any performance prob lems caused by the use of E85 fuel CAUTION Never use gasohol which contains methanol Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs dri vability A020104AUN Use of MTBE KIA recommends avoiding fuels contain ing MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight in your vehicle Fuel containing MTBE over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight may reduce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting J CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance prob lems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether over 15 0 vol Oxygen Content 2 7 weight A020105AUN Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol wood alco hol should not be used in your vehicle This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per formance and damage components of the fuel system A020106AUN Gasolines for cleaner air To help contribute to cleaner air KIA rec ommends that you use gasolines treated with dete
47. Ez ITEM Months E eo Ea e a e ee ee ee e a aionaictarenissn mad O A a 7 Gress a undetoaybotsemuts TTT TTL TTT ttre y tyra Tire condition amp inflation pressure Eo EE Eo EE Eo hh l Wheel alignment 4 Inspect when abnormal condition noted Tire rotation Rotate the tires every 12 000 km SS aiee O a a a a a a E E a E E Pover ten TUA E Tres E e E e eeM M Driveshaft u joints L Driveshaft dust boots Ee E mE E E E e Safety belts buckles amp anchors En EE EE EE EEE EE EE ER Lock hinges amp hood latch L ee ee ee ee ee eee ese ga sce e e e e Maintenance E e rrr Chart symbols l Inspect these items and their related parts If necessary correct clean refill adjust of replace R Replace or change L Lubricate 1 Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner s Manual 2 More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions 3 More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions a Short distance driving b Driving on dusty roads c Extensive idling or slow speed driving in stop and go traffic 4 If necessary rotate and balance the wheels Note Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week Maintenance ee O EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS G050100AHM Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule If th
48. R but ton Then the clock will be set precisely on the hour For example if the R button is pressed while the time is between 9 01 and 9 29 the display will reset to 9 00 9 01 9 29 display changed to 9 00 9 30 9 59 display changed to 10 00 D280604AHM Display conversion To change the 12 hour format to the 24 hour format press the R button until the display blinks For example if the R button is pressed while the time is 10 15 p m the display will change to 22 15 E Features of your vehicle m Type A e The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive For details refer to the Climate control system in section 4 e Temperature lt gt Seconds 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion 2 Press the H button at least 3 times within 3 seconds while pressing the R OHM048153 button D280800AHM 3 The temperature mode will change to Clothes hanger OUTSIDE the time mode The time displays in seconds CAUTION 4 If the M button is pressed the clock s Do not hang heavy clothes the minute will change and the counting hook may be damaged O a will start again from the beginning og i 00 5 To return to the temperature mode press the H button at least 3 times PEETEOCARNEEL within 3 seconds while pressing the R Outside thermometer button The current outside temperature is dis If th
49. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations Safety features of your vehicle C040800AHM Why didn t my air bag go off ina collision Inflation and non infla tion conditions of the air bag There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expect ed to provide additional protection These include rear impacts second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents as well as low speed impacts In other words just because your vehicle is damaged and even if it is totally unusable don t be surprised that the air bags did not inflate OHM038037L OHM038038N OHM038039 0HM038040 OHM038041 Air bag collision sensors 1 SRS control module 3 Side impact sensor if equipped Rollover sensor if equipped 4 Side impact sensor if equipped 2 Front impact sensor Safety features of your vehicle 1VQA2084 C040801AHM Air bag inflation conditions Front air bags Front air bags are designed to inflate ina frontal collision depending on the intensi ty soeed or angles of impact of the front collision Safety features of your vehicle wai P7 D lt 7 og i lel A _ a O Side impact and curtain air bags if equipped Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact co
50. While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the select area and press the key to select FM mode 3 The FM1 FM2 AM mode screen will become displayed Select the desired broadcast station to begin listening FM 1 O eano r 87 70 Starting FM AM mode by use of Rear remote control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the RADIO key on the Rear Remote Control will display the most recently operated RADIO mode In addition pressing the RADIO key will change the mode in FM1 FM2 AM FM1 order FM AM mode menu screen configura tion 1 Mode display This will display the current mode FM1 FM2 AM 2 PRESET button The station can be easily selected by storing the desired frequency in advance 3 TUNE button The frequency station is increased or reduced incrementally 4 SEEK button The channel is automatically searched through the SEEK function 5 BAND button The mode is changed in FM1FM2 AM FM1 order 6 SCAN SEEK display This becomes displayed when the SCAN SEEK functions are operating The RSE supports only the AUDIO SCAN function 7 Station display The station of the currently playing broadcast is displayed Features of your vehicle 8 Stereo reception display This is displayed when the current broadcast is a stereo broadcast Methods of Station selection Selecting station through Preset This function allows st
51. adverse ly affect safe operation of the vehi cle Features of your vehicle Care of discs If the temperature inside the vehicle is too high open the vehicle windows for ventilation before using your vehicle audio It is illegal to copy and use MP3 WMA files without permission Use CDs that are created only by lawful means Do not apply volatile agents such as benzene and thinner normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for ana logue disc onto CDs To prevent the disc surface from get ting damaged Hold and carry CDs by the edges or the edges of the center hole only Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback wipe it from the center to the outside edge Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or paper onto it Make sure objects other than CDs are not inserted into the CD player Do not insert more than one CD at a time Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt Depending on the type of CD R CD RW CDs certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or making and recording methods In such circumstances if you still continue to use those CDs they may cause the malfunction of your vehicle audio system NOTICE Playing an Incompatible Copy Protected Audio CD Some copy protected CDs which do not comply with the international audio CD standards Red Book may not play on your vehicle audio Please
52. amp 2 C Child restraint system EELE TTT T A E E TT 3 32 Climate control air filter E E 7 21 Cruise control system E E A E N E N TTT 5 39 _ E O Defroster EET E E N a N A T E T E TE E E E 4 83 Dimensions A E E T a E E E E S T amp 2 Door locks A E A A S E E A E TE 4 15 Driver position memory system LAE E ere ewe ctasee s 4 34 E Economical operation ssssesesssssesesesarersveaoasnseasaanes 5 45 Emergency starting ee Ct E A T 6 4 Emission control SYSTEM Re 7 67 Engine COMPpartMEnt Meee 2 4 7 2 Engine Coolant e 7 15 Engine number eee s g 7 Parne olera a E 7 14 ENGINE START STOP button eeeeeeeeeeeeee esseere reeet 5 6 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7 11 aclateMiist ce 4 122 BEC Four wheel dive AWD seecerecesscssetitoczecesncecsnenctassanareenn 5 18 Feel filer iesiri aaa a a aa 4 27 Fuel requirements ee ee er 1 3 Pee EAN ANIE E E N EA A PO T AEE 7 42 HWB o o O Hazard warning flasher aa E E E E E ES 4 71 PU ec EEE EITE I A A 4 25 How to use this manual r r E E T E ETT 1 2 Doo If the engine overheats naval ESTS RETAK ET Ks reL ero risa iaa 6 6 Index eee If the engine will not start ssssessssesssssecsoooeecoooeecesoseeeeoes 6 3 z If you haye a Gis Bilistie oO 6 12 In case of an emergency while driving 6 2 Parking brake e eeeeesereersesesresseseerensensereerensenserenreneeneeneneens 7 20 Indicator symbols on the instrument cluste
53. and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perform ance Temperature A B amp C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure Grades B and A represent higher levels of perform ance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Maintenance i G201100AHM EC Tire terminology and definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire Air pressure is expressed in kilopascal kPa or pounds per square inch psi Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional acces sories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmis sion power seats and air condition ing Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrap
54. and distilled water 4 6 Engine 14 0 1 14 7 US qt Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator Brake fluid 0 7 0 8 0 7 0 8 US qt FMVSS116 DOT 3 or DOT 4 1 3 1 4 1 1 4 1 5 US at l ae 1 4 1 5 1 1 5 1 6 US qt or HYPOID GEAR OIL 4 CENNA DA Rear oe 1 7 1 9 1 1 9 2 0 US qt SAE 90 API GL 5 1 7 1 9 1 1 9 2 0 US qt Transfer case oil ATF DEXRON III or equivalent 1 5 1 7 1 1 6 1 8 US at Fuel Ter oeuSga O oS 1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available Along with other additional benefits they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction Often these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving but in a year s time they can offer significant cost and energy savings 3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country you are able to use API service SL The volume may differ according to the vehicle For more details refer to your authorized KIA dealer Specifications amp Consumer information 1040100BUN EU Recommended SAE viscosity number CAUTION Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug drain plug or dipstick before checking or drain ing any lubricant This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt a
55. and lift it Features of your vehicle INTERIOR FEATURES D280300AHM Cup holder E OHM048133N Kik 152 D280302AHM Center To open the cover press the cover and it will slowly open Place a cup or small beverage can in the holder after spreading the support 1 OHM048134 D280301 AHM Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders E Features of your vehicle E Front CAUTION Vanity mirror lamp if equipped Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use If the vanity mirror is not closed securely the lamp will stay on and could result in battery discharge and pos sible sunvisor damage OEN046157 D280400AHM Sunvisor Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows To use the sunvisor pull it downward To use the sunvisor for the side window pull it downward unsnap it from the bracket 1 and swing it to the side 2 To use the vanity mirror pull down the l visor and slide the mirror cover 3 Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward 4 The ticket holder 5 is provided for hold ing a tollgate ticket if equipped 164N Features of your vehicle D280500AEN Power outlet The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems The devices should draw less than
56. and the CD slot indicator b blinks e Insert a CD while the slot indicator blinks e After the CD is inserted the rest of the empty CD slots number blink e Repeat step 2 and 3 until all of the slots are loaded A CAUTION e Insert a CD only while Insert Disc 1 6 is displayed and the slot indicator blinks e Don t insert two CDs for one oper ation Features of your vehicle CAUTION IN USING USB DEVICE To use an external USB device make sure the device is not mounted when starting up the vehicle and mount the device after starting up If you start the vehicle when the USB device is mounted it may damage the USB device USB is not ESA If the vehicle is started up or turned off while the external USB device is connected the external USB device may not work It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files 1 It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps 320Kbps 2 It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps 320Kbps Take cautions for static electricity when mounting or dismounting the external USB device An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not recognizable Continued Continued Depending on the condition of the external USB device the con nected external USB device can be unrecognizable When the formatted byte sector setting of External USB devices is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE then the device will not be recog nized Use on
57. as possible If you are still stuck after a few tries have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transmission A CAUTION Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating transmission damage or failure and tire damage See EE Driving your vehicle x NOTICE The ESC system if equipped should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle OUN056051 E110300AUN Smooth cornering Avoid braking or gear changing in cor ners especially when roads are wet Ideally corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration If you follow these suggestions tire wear will be held to a minimum E110400AUN Driving at night Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight here are some important tips to remember e Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles as it may be more difficult to see at night especially in areas where there may not be any street lights Driving your vehicle Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver s headlights Keep your headlights clean and prop erly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more diffi cult to see at night Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles You could be temporarily blinded and it will take several seconds for your eyes to
58. beeps intermittently e When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm 31 in to 16 in from the rear bumper Buzzer beeps more frequently e When an object is within 40 cm 15 in of the rear bumper Buzzer sounds continuously D170200AEN EU Non operational conditions of rear parking assist system The rear parking assist system may not operate properly when 1 Moisture is frozen to the sensor It will operate normally when the moisture has been cleared 2 The sensor is covered with foreign matter such as snow or water or the sensor cover is blocked It will operate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no longer blocked 3 Driving on uneven road surfaces unpaved roads gravel bumps gradi ent 4 Objects generating excessive noise vehicle horns loud motorcycle engines or truck air brakes are within range of the sensor 5 Heavy rain or water spray exists 6 Wireless transmitters or mobile phones are within range of the sensor 7 The sensor is covered with snow 8 Trailer towing The detecting range may decrease when 1 The sensor is stained with foreign mat ter such as snow or water The sens ing range will return to normal when removed 2 Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold The following objects may not be rec ognized by the sensor 1 Sharp or slim objects such as ropes chains or small poles 2 Objects which tend to absorb the sen sor frequency such as
59. besides Region Code 1 United States American region Canada or All region disc is inserted then a Region Code Error screen will be displayed and disc play will not be supported Color TV support This device supports the NTSC color tel evision system Other systems beside NTSC are not supported DVD mode menu screen configura tion Ay DVDP 0v0 Q Se A 0 CY re Hie so TITLE 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is DVD mode of the DVD Player 2 FAST FORWARD button The current title can be fast forwarded Continue to press the button until the desired chapter has been reached 3 FAST REWIND button The current title can be rewinded Continue to press the button until the desired chapter has been reached 4 CHAPTER DOWN button Moves to the previous chapter 5 CHAPTER UP button Moves to the next chapter Features of your vehicle 6 PLAY PAUSE button Pauses or replays the DVD 7 SEARCH button The desired title chapter can be directly selected by searching the chapters titles Searches are not supported when the initial logo video menu is being dis played Searches are possible only when the video is playing 8 MENU button This is used to return to the initial menu setup screen while a DVD title is playing 9 TITLE button For some types of DVD titles there could be several initial menu setup screens This is used to return to the root setu
60. between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle Also apply the brake gently E120101AUN Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehicle make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle s handling in all weather conditions Keep in mind that the traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehi cle s original equipment tires You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear Check with the tire dealer for max imum speed recommendations Do not install studded tires without first checking local state and municipal regu lations for possible restrictions against their use Se Driving your vehicle E120200AUN Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system lubri cates the water pump and prevents freezing Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 7 Before winter have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter E120300AUN Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system Visually inspect the bat tery and cables
61. brakes This can cause them to overheat and malfunc tion Instead when you are driving down a long hill slow down and shift to a lower gear When you do this engine braking will help slow down the car Slow down before shifting to a lower gear Otherwise the lower gear may not be engaged e Always use the parking brake Do not depend on placing the transmission in P Park to keep the vehicle from mov ing Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface Be especially careful when braking accelerating or shifting gears On a slippery surface an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelera tor pedal Driving your vehicle E060203AHM Moving up a steep grade from a stand ing start To move up a steep grade from a stand ing start depress the brake pedal shift the shift lever to D Drive Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade and release the parking brake Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the service brakes Driving your vehicle FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD IF EQUIPPED E170000AHM Engine power can be delivered to all front and rear wheels for maximum traction 4WD is useful when extra traction is required on road such as when driving on slippery muddy wet or snow cove
62. broadcast ing stations military installa tions airports or transmitting towers etc This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Continued Continued If there Is a failed tire sensor it is possible for the TPMS to temporarily learn a replace ment sensor if closely driven to another vehicle that is also equipped with TPMS In rare cases this may temporarily delay the TPMS malfunction indicator from turning on The TPMS malfunction indica tor may be illuminated if Snow chains or some electronic devices such as notebook computers are used in the vehicle These can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS What to do in an emergency FO60300AHM EC Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire the Low Tire Pressure telltale will turn on Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the tempo rary spare tire x NOTICE NEVER use a puncture repairing agent to repair and or inflate a low pressure tire If used you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem You must use TPMS specific wheels It is rec ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible After you replace the low pressure tire with the spare ti
63. center of the tire valve Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and mois ture G200400AUN Tire rotation To equalize tread wear it is recom mended that the tires be rotated every 12 000 km 7 500 miles or sooner if irregular wear develops During rotation check the tires for correct balance When rotating tires check for uneven wear and damage Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres sure improper wheel alignment out of balance wheels severe braking or severe cornering Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible After rotation be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness Refer to Tire and wheels in section 8 Maintenance Without a spare tire NOTICE pcan Rotate radial tires that have an Wheel alignment and tire balance asymmetric tread pattern only from The wheels on your vehicle were es e front to rear and not from right to aligned and balanced carefully at the left factory to give you the longest tire life q eo and best overall performance In most cases you will not need to have your wheels aligned again However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other th
64. clothes spongy material or snow 3 Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m 40 in in height and narrower than 14 cm 6 in in diameter ane eee eee Features of your vehicle D170300AEN EU Rear parking assist system pre cautions The rear parking assist system may not sound sequentially depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected The rear parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bumper height or sensor installation has been modified or damaged Any non factory installed equipment or accessories may also interfere with the sensor per formance The sensor may not recognize objects less than 40 cm 15 in from the sen sor or it may sense an incorrect dis tance Use caution When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow dirt or water the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth Do not push scratch or strike the sen sor Sensor damage could occur x NOTICE This system can only sense objects with in the range and location of the sensors It can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed Also small or slim objects such as poles or objects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors Always visually check behind the vehi cle when backing up Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabili ties and limitations D170400AHM Self di
65. control switch if equipped oOo NOOA ON od oad Bmmeponoonga OHM048100 OHM048101 Features of your vehicle E Type B e Front climate control A C display Front fan speed control switch Driver s temperature control switch AUTO automatic control button Front blower OFF button Air conditioning button Front windshield defroster button Dual temperature control selection button 9 Mode selection button fe pad alle alan 10 Outside fresh air position button _ x o 0 m umm 11 Rear window defroster button 12 Recirculated air position button 13 Rear blower ON OFF button controlled from the front 14 Passenger s temperature control switch 15 Rear fan speed control switch controlled from the front 16 Rear temperature control switch oOo NOOA ON e Rear climate control if equipped 17 Rear mode selection button a 18 Rear blower ON OFF button a 19 Rear fan speed control switch if equipped OHM048224N OHM048101 Features of your vehicle 2 Set the temperature switch to the desired temperature If the temperature is set to the lowest setting Lo the air conditioning sys tem will operate continuously 3 To turn the automatic operation off select any button or switch of the fol lowing e Mode selection button e Air conditioning button e Front windshield defroster button A OHM04
66. dealer as soon as possible D150313AUN Charging system warning light E This warning light indicates a malfunction of either the generator or electrical charging system If the warning light comes on while the vehicle is in motion 1 Drive to the nearest safe location 2 With the engine off check the genera tor drive belt for looseness or break age 3 If the belt is adjusted properly a prob lem exists somewhere in the electrical charging system Have an authorized KIA dealer correct the problem as soon as possible Features of your vehicle D150316AHM Door open posi tion indicator Type A AR Type B This indicator illuminates when a door is not closed securely The indicator displays which door is opened D150315AUN Tailgate open warning light g This warning light illuminates when the tailgate is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position See eee eee Features of your vehicle D150316AUN Door ajar warning light 2 This warning light illuminates when a door is not closed securely with the igni tion switch in any position D150317AHM EE Immobilizer indicator T if equipped Without smart key system This indicator light illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON position to start the engine At this time you can start the engine The light goes out after the engine is running If this light blinks when the igni
67. dot to index with the jack OCM054012 Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground This measurement is approximately 30 mm 1 2 in Before removing the wheel lug nuts make sure the vehicle is sta ble and that there is no chance for movement or slippage What to do in an emergency 10 To install the wheel hold it on the studs put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again 11 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise 9 Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away To put the wheel on the hub pick up the spare tire line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them If this is difficult tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs What to do in an emergency OHM06801 2 Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench han dle Go around the wheel tightening every nut following t
68. drive in off road condi tions such as sand mud or water Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off road use especially cleaning the bottom of the vehicle e Since the driving torque is always applied to the 4 wheels the perform ance of the 4WD vehicle is greatly affected by the condition of the tires Be sure to equip the vehicle with four tires of the same size and type e A full time four wheel drive vehicle cannot be towed by an ordinary tow truck Make sure that the vehicle is placed on a flat bed truck for moving CAUTION Mud or snow If one of the front or rear wheels begins to spin in mud snow etc the vehicle can sometimes be driv en out by depressing the accelera tor pedal further however avoid running the engine continuously at high rpm because doing so could damage the 4WD system E170800AHM Reducing the risk of a rollover This multi purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle SUV SUV s have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteris tics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road which allows you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger vehi cles any more than low slung sports vehicles are designed to perform
69. embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and or on the cover of the driver s side knee bolster located below the steering wheel and the passenger s side front panel pad above the glove box C040400AHM EC Driver s and passenger s front air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint Air Bag System and lap shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions Safety features of your vehicle Passenger s front air bag OHM038034 The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel in the knee bolster below the steering wheel column and the pas senger s side front panel above the glove box The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle s driver and or the front passen ger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity The SRS uses sensors to gath er information about the driver s seat position the driver s and front passen ger s seat belt usage and impact severi ty The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger s seat belts are fastened These sensors pro vide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fastened and how severe the impact Is The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two lev els A first stage level is provided f
70. features of your vehicle Adjust the seat before driving and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever If the seat moves it is not locked properly C010302AHM Seatback angle To recline the seatback 1 2 3 Pull up the seatback recline lever Hold the lever and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock OHM038049N C010303AHM Headrest The rear seat s is equipped with head rests in all the seating positions for the occupant s safety and comfort The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision Safety features of your vehicle Adjusting the height up and down To raise the headrest pull it up to the desired position 1 To lower the head rest push and hold the release button 2 on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position 3 OHM038018N Removal To remove the headrest raise it as far as it can go then press the release button 1 while pulling the headrest up 2 To reinstall the headrest put the head rest poles 3 into the holes while pessing the release button 1 Then adjust it to the appropriate height Safety features of your vehicle C010304AHM
71. filler cap can result in a seri ous malfunction of the fuel sys i ee g tem or emission control system SAA OHM048023N Do not spill fuel on the exterior D100500AHM EU surfaces of the vehicle Any type Emergency fuel filler lid release ih T eg ee 4 oy j TET ge A A i i 5 ee i a a i F ie a pe of fuel spilled on painted surfaces if the fuel filler lid does not open using may damage the paint the remote fuel filler lid release you can e After refueling make sure the fuel open it manually with a coin or flat blade cap is installed securely to pre screwdriver etc Remove the panel in the vent fuel spillage in the event of luggage compartment area Pull the han an accident dle out slightly A CAUTION Do not pull the handle excessively otherwise the luggage compart ment area trim or release handle may be damaged See eee cece al Features of your vehicle SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED O O 9 NOTICE e In cold and wet climates the sunroof may not work properly due to freez ing conditions e After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it J CAUTION Do not continue to move the sun roof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened closed or tilted Damage to the motor or system components could occur D110000AHM EE If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof you can slide or til
72. fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception But it could be removed when parking the vehi cle or when loading cargo on the roof rack When cargo is loaded on the roof rack do not place the cargo near Antenna the antenna pole to ensure proper D300102AHM EU reception Your vehicle uses a roof antenna or glass antenna to receive AM and or FM broad cast signals OHM048235N Features of your vehicle OHM048146N D300200AEN Steering wheel audio control if equipped The steering wheel audio control button is installed to promote safe driving CAUTION Do not operate audio remote con trol buttons simultaneously D300204AHM VOLUME VOL 1 e Pull the up button A to increase the volume e Pull the down button V to decrease the volume D300203AHM SEEK PRESET 2 The SEEK PRESET button has different functions based on the system mode For the following functions the button should be pressed for 0 8 second or more RADIO mode It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button CDP mode It will function as the FF REW button CDC mode It will function as the DISC UP DOWN button If the SEEK PRESET button is pressed for less than 0 8 second it will work as follows in each mode RADIO mode It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons CDP mode It will function as the TRACK UP DOWN button CDC mode It will function as the T
73. iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device When not using iPod with car audio detach the iPod cable from iPod If not the iPod may remain in accessary mode and may not work properly Features of your vehicle RSE DVD AUX2 WITH BLUETOOTH Bwetvoth Gibisc ow 1 DVDP TRACK UP DOWN Button 2 DVDP TITLE UP DOWN Button 3 RSE ON OFF RSE LOCK UNLOCK Button 4 AUX2 DVD Selection Button CD AUX 4 FOLDER v PA965HMU Features of your vehicle Using the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE 1 DVD Chapter Selection Button e Press TRACK V button to play from the beginning of current track e Press TRACK V button again within 3 seconds to play the previous track e Press SEEK A button for less than 0 8 second to play the next track 2 DVD Title Selection Button e Press FOLDER V button to play the previous track e Press CAT button to play the next track 3 RSE ON OFF LOCK UNLOCK Button When the RSE ON OFF LOCK UNLOCK button is pushed for less than 0 8 sec ond the red color LED of the button will light and RSE unit will be locked If you push button for more than 0 8 second the green color LED of the button will light and RSE unit will turn on and RSE will appear on the LCD 4 DVD AUX2 Selection Button In the event there is a DVD inserted and an auxiliary device is connected to the RSE system pressing the DVD AUX2 button will switch between DVD and AUX2 modes
74. important to check occasionally to be sure the trail er bulbs are still working You must also check the lights every time you discon nect and then reconnect the wires Do not connect a trailer lighting system directly to your vehicle s lighting system Use only an approved trailer wiring har ness An authorized KIA dealer can assist you in installing the wiring harness N CAUTION Electrical cur rent limit of the light Current of the trailer s light load Left turn amp stop light max 5 A Right turn amp stop light max 5 A Back up light max 15 A Tail light max 15 A If the current limit is exceeded the trailer light may not work properly E140406AHM Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you don t shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer operate efficiently On a long uphill grade shift down and reduce your speed to around 70 km h 45 mph to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission overheating If your trailer weighs more than the max imum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transmission you should drive in D Drive when tow ing a trailer Operating your vehicle in D Drive when towing a trailer will minimize heat build up and extend the life of your transmission See Driving your vehicle E140407AHM 5 Start the ve
75. important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few rea sons why you ll need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow e Do you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch If you don t seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle as well as dirt and water e The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for hitches Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to them Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper KIA trailer hitch accessory is available at an authorized KIA dealer E140200AUN Safety chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer Follow the man ufacturer s recommendation for attaching safety chains Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your trailer And never allow safety chains to drag on the ground E140300AUN EU Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system make sure it conforms to federal and or local regulations and that it is properly
76. in place If it is not release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6 7 Double check that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor If you cannot the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode To remove the child restraint press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position the retractor will automatically switch from the Auto Lock mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage Safety features of your vehicle OHM038047N 2GHA3300L C030103AEN 1 Route the child restraint seat strap Securing a child restraint seat with over the seatback tether anchor system For vehicles with adjustable head Child restraint hook holders are located rests route the tether strap under the on the back of the rear seatbacks headrest and between the headrest posts otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback 2 Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat ane eee eo Safety features of your vehicle OUN036101L C030104AHM EU Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LAT
77. in the engine coolant reservoir e Check the operation of all exterior lights including the stoplights turn sig nals and hazard warning flashers e Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare G030104AHM At least twice a year i e every Spring and Fall e Check the radiator heater and air con ditioning hoses for leaks or damage e Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid e Check the headlight alignment e Check the muffler exhaust pipes shields and clamps e Check the lap shoulder belts for wear and function e Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts G030105AHM At least once a year e Clean the body and door drain holes e Lubricate the door hinges and checks and hood hinges e Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches Lubricate the door rubber weather Strips e Check the air conditioning system e Check the power steering fluid level Inspect and lubricate the automatic transmission linkage and controls Clean the battery and terminals e Check the brake fluid level Maintenance MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE G040100AHM EC Engine control system MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first INTERVALS SRE 1 000 km e 16 Fea 32 fao 48 5e 64 iral eo fasl 95 koa 112 faa 128 ITEM Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 4 52 se 6
78. indicates over heating switch off the A C and stop the vehicle in a safe area to cool down the engine When towing check transmission fluid more frequently If your vehicle is not equipped with the air conditioner you should install a condenser fan to improve engine performance when towing a trailer Driving your vehicle E140600AHM kg Ibs If you do decide to pull a trailer Here are some important points if you w 3 8L Engine 4 6L Engine decide to pull a trailer Consider using a sway control You can Maxmum ask a hitch dealer about sway control Trailer with brakes 2270 5000 3400 7500 Do not do any towing with your vehicle during its first 2 000 km 1 200 miles Weight a 750 1650 750 1650 in order to allow the engine to properly rakes break in Failure to heed this caution Maximum may result in serious engine or trans 227 500 340 750 mission damage Tongue weight When towing a trailer be sure to con sult an authorized KIA dealer for fur ther information on additional require ments such as a towing kit etc Always drive your vehicle at a moder ate speed less than 100 km h 60 mph On a long uphill grade do not exceed 70 km h 45 mph or the posted towing speed limit whichever is lower The chart contains important consider ations that have to do with weight Driving your vehicle Total Trailer Weight Tongue Load C190E01JM E140601AHM Weight of the trailer What is the
79. is pressed again e The vehicle speed is over 60 km h 38 mph Driving your vehicle X NOTICE The DBC does not turn ON in the P Park position The DBC may not activate if the ESC or BAS is activated Noise or vibration may occur from the brakes when the DBC is activated The rear stop light comes on when the DBC is activated In a very steep hill even though the brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed the DBC may not deacti vate Always turn OFF the DBC on normal roads The DBC might activate from the standby mode when abrupt corn ing or driving through speed bumps E070600AHM Good braking practices Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away Driving through water may get the brakes wet They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed Wet brakes can be dangerous Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side To dry the brakes apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times If the braking action does not return to normal stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized KIA dealer for assis tance ane eee eee Driving your vehicle Don t coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear This is extremely haz ardous Keep the vehicle in gear at all times use
80. lights are off If any are still on this indicates a situation that needs attention When releasing the parking brake the brake system warning light should go off The fuel warning light will stay on if the fuel level is low D150340AHM EU ECO indicator if equipped The ECO indicator helps to improve fuel efficiency when you are driving e The ECO indicator green will turn on when you drive fuel efficiently in the ECO ON mode If you don t want the indicator displayed you can turn the ECO ON mode to OFF mode by press ing the RESET button for more than 1 second button When the instant fuel consumption mode if equipped is displayed on the LCD display or the system is not work ing properly the indicator turns off If the indicator turns off when the instant fuel consumption mode is not selected have the system checked by an author ized KIA dealer as soon as possible The fuel efficiency depends on the dri ver s driving habit and road condition The system stops operating when the transmission is in the P Park R Reverse N Neutral position sports mode or when the instant fuel con sumption mode is selected Se ae ae R Features of your vehicle D150302AUN g Air bag warning light e FN This warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System SRS is not working prope
81. maximum safe weight of a trailer It should never weigh more than the maximum trailer weight with trailer brakes But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your trailer For example speed altitude road grades outside temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important The ideal trailer weight can also depend on any special equip ment that you have on your vehicle Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight C190E02JM E140602ASA Weight of the trailer tongue The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross vehicle weight GVW of your vehicle This weight includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle And if you tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will also be carrying that weight The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi mum of 10 of the total loaded trailer weight within the limits of the maximum trailer tongue load permissible After you ve loaded your trailer weigh the trail er and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they aren t you may be able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer Driving your vehicle OHM068032N E140700AHM Service Connector for towing brake controller 1 Trailer brake blue 2 Battery black 3 Stop
82. not recommended Any combina tions of radial ply and bias ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling The best rule to fol low is Identical radial ply tires should always be used as a Set of four Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires Cuts and punctures in radial ply tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your tire dealer for radial ply tire repairs Maintenance FUSES Blade type Normal Blown Cartridge type a Normal Blown Fusible link 1VQA4037 Normal G210000AHM A vehicle s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses This vehicle has 5 fuse panels one locat ed in the driver s side panel bolster the others in the engine compartment and luggage compartment If any of your vehicle s lights acces sories or controls do not work check the appropriate circuit fuse If a fuse has blown the element inside the fuse will melt If the electrical system does not work first check the driver s side fuse panel Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating If the replacement fuse blows this indi cates an electrical problem Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an a
83. note that if you try to play copy protected CDs and the CD player does not perform correct ly the CDs maybe defective not the CD player Features of your vehicle RADIO SET UP VOLUME CONTROL E Type A 1 FM AM Selection Button 7 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume 9 Control Knob cD AUX USB 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button 4 SCAN Selection Button ru AUOIO CONTROL SCAN et 5 Preset Selection Button z oi 7 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob 7 MUTE Button A 200HMU Features of your vehicle E Type B 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume Control Knob cD ee 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button m conmo 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Preset Selection Button 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob A 300HMU Features of your vehicle E Type C 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume Control Knob CD AUX 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Preset Selection Button 2 wom E E a SC c O 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob A 350HMU Features of your vehicle How to Activate RADIO SET UP VOLUME Control 1 FM AM Selection Button The FM AM button toggles between FM and AM Listed below are the paths as the system switches from FM to AM and back to FM e FM AM FM1 FM2AM FM1 e FM FM1 FM2FM1 2 Power ON OFF Button amp Volume Control Knob e Turns the audio system on off when the ignition switch is on
84. of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode 3 Select the AUX mode button 4 Select the iPod button on the AUX mode screen 5 The iPod will begin playing POP Beyonce Knowles Deja Vu INFO Features of your vehicle NOTICE Refer to the MP3 mode section in Chapter 5 for additional USB related operational instructions 1 Refer to the MP3 mode section in Chapter 5 for additional iPod related operational instructions Some iPod devices may not play if the communication protocol is not sup ported by the device Supported iPods mini 4G Photo Nano 5G The search and song order on the iPod device may differ with the search and song order of the AV system RESET the iPod in the case of errors which occur due to malfunctions on the iPod device Refer to the iPod manual J CAUTION 1 In order to operate the iPod with the AV system buttons a sepa rately sold iPod connector cable must be used x Please refrain from using the PC cable in the package as the device may not properly operate 2 When connecting the iPod cable push the end of the JACK under the terminal so that it does not cause interference with the com munication 3 Having the iPod cable connected even when there is no iPod can convert the device into AUX mode causing an occurrence of noise Please make sure to remove the i
85. of the anti lock brake system may result in a longer stopping dis tance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system CAUTION e If the ABS warning light is on and stays on you may have a problem with the ABS In this case howev er your regular brakes will work normally The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON During that time the ABS will go through self diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal If the light stays on you may have a problem with your ABS Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible CAUTION e When you drive on a road having poor traction such as an icy road and have operated your brakes continuously the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate Pull your car over to a safe place and stop the engine e Restart the engine If the ABS warning light goes off then your ABS system is normal Otherwise you may have a prob lem with the ABS Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible x NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time This happens because of low bat tery voltage It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioned e Do not pump your brakes e Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle See ee eee Driving your v
86. of the vehicle This is normal and is a result of the igni tion of the air bag inflator After the air bag inflates you may feel substantial dis comfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag as well as from breathing the smoke and powder Open your doors and or windows as soon as possible after the impact in order to reduce dis comfort and prevent prolonged expo sure to the smoke and powder Though the smoke and powder are non toxic they may cause irritation to the skin eyes nose and throat etc If this is the case wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists 1JBH3051 C040903AEN Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger s seat Never place a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger s seat If the air bag deploys it would impact the rear fac ing child restraint Causing serious or fatal injury In addition do not place front facing child restraints in the front passenger s seat either If the front passenger air bag inflates it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child eo I C041000AEN Air bag warning light The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System SRS W7 147 Safety features of your vehicle When the ignition switch is turned ON the warnin
87. read just to the darkness 1VQA3003 E110500AUN Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous especially if you re not pre pared for the slick pavement Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain e A heavy rainfall will make it harder to see and will increase the distance needed to stop your vehicle so slow down e Keep your windshield wiping equip ment in good shape Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield If your tires are not in good condition making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident Be sure your tires are in good shape Turn on your headlights to make it eas ier for others to see you Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes If you must go through puddles try to drive through them slowly If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet apply them lightly while driving until normal braking oper ation returns E110600AUN Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no high er than the bottom of the wheel hub Drive through any water slowly Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected After driving through water dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly See eee eed Driving your vehicle F
88. replaced G230104AUN Bright metal maintenance e To remove road tar and insects use a tar remover not a scraper or other sharp object To protect the surfaces of bright metal parts from corrosion apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster e During winter weather or in coastal areas cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preserva tive If necessary coat the parts with non corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound Maintenance ee G230105ASA Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may col lect on the underbody If these materials are not removed accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have been treated with rust protection Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month after off road driving and at the end of each winter Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it The lower edges of the doors rocker panels and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt trapped water in these areas can cause rusting G230106AHM Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective fi
89. satis factorily in off road conditions Due to this risk driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts In a rollover crash an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers do not load your roof rack with heavy cargo and never modify your vehicle in any way See ee ceed Driving your vehicle E170600AHM E170700AHM Full time 4WD vehicles must be tested on a special four wheel chassis dynamometer Part time 4WD vehicles must be tested on a 2WD roll tester with the transfer shift knob in the 2H position x NOTICE Never engage the parking brake while performing these tests A full time 4WD vehicle should not be tested on a 2WD roll tester If a 2WD roll tester must be used perform the following Driving your vehicle Temporary free roller Roll tester speedometer OHM058020 1 Check the tire pressures recommend ed for your vehicle 2 Place the rear wheels on the roll tester for a speedometer test as shown in the illustration 3 Release the parking brake 4 Place the front wheels on the tempo rary free roller as shown in the illustra tion BRAKE SYSTEM E070100AHM Power brakes Your vehicle has power assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage In the event that the power ass
90. stop before shifting into or out of R Reverse you may damage the transmission if you shift into R Reverse while the vehicle is in motion except when Rocking the vehicle explained in this section N Neutral The wheels and transmission are not engaged The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied D Drive This is the normal forward driving posi tion The transmission will automatically shift through a 5 or 6 gear sequence providing the best fuel economy and power For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades depress the accelerator fully at which time the trans mission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear x NOTICE Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D Driving OHM058005L Sports mode Whether the vehicle is stopped or in motion sports mode is selected by push ing the shift lever from the D Drive posi tion into the manual gate To return to the D Drive range operation push the shift lever back into the main gate In sports mode moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly In contrast to a manual transmission the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed Up Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear Down Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear Driving yo
91. tensioner seat belts were activat ed x NOTICE Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre tensioner seat belt the SRS air bag warning light 7 on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position and then it should turn off CAUTION If the pre tensioner seat belt is not working properly this warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven please have an authorized KIA dealer inspect the pre tensioner seat belt and SRS air bag system as soon as possible Safety features of your vehicle C020300AUN EU C020306AUN Seat belt precautions Infant or small child You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country Child and or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat For more information about the use of these restraints refer to Child restraint sys tem in this section Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the require ments of the safety standards of you
92. the DISC key on the remote control will not begin mode operation Selecting a file or searching current file with the Rear Remote Control 1 Press the SEEK TRACK UP DOWN button on the Remote Control to move to the previous or next file 2 Pressing the TUNE UP DOWN button on the Remote Control will quickly search the previous or next files NOTICE In the case of CD Changer The RAN DOM REPEAT and SCAN functions are supported only by the FRONT sys tem There are no buttons for these functions in the REAR system and the method of operating the FRONT system are the same as the REAR system In the case of DVD Player The RAN DOM REPEAT and SCAN functions are not supported in the FRONT and REAR systems Features of your vehicle MP3 mode menu screen configura tion CDC mp3 1 0 8 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is MP3 mode of the CD Changer 2 FAST FORWARD button The file is fast forwarded 3 FAST REWIND button The file is rewinded 4 FILE DOWN button The start of the current or previous file will begin playing The start of the current file will begin playing if the file has played for over 3 seconds The start of the previ ous file will begin playing if the file has played for under 3 seconds 5 FILE UP button The start of the next song will begin play Ing 6 Play time display The play time of the currently playing song Is displayed 7 DISC number dis
93. the decks in the respective order 3 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RDM mode and more than 0 8 second to activate ALL RDM mode e RDM Only files tracks in a folder disc are played in random sequence e ALL RDM MP3 WMA Only All files tracks in a folder disc are played in random sequence 4 Automatic Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current track file Press again within 1 seconds to return to the previous track file Press and hold TRACK V to initiate rewind search Press SEEK for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance the next track file e Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 5 REPEAT Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RPT mode and more than 0 8 second to activate FLD RPT mode e RPT Only a track file is played repeatedly e FLD RPT MP3 WMA Only Only files in a folder are played repeatedly 6 SCROLL Play Button File names are scrolled for 5 seconds on the display 7 CD Indicator CDP ONLY When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and if the CD is loaded this indicator is illuminated 8 CD Selection Button e If the CD is loaded turns to CD mode e If there is no Disc in the deck it dis plays NO DISC for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode 9 SCAN Selection Button Plays back the first 10 seconds of each
94. the CD slot indicator b blinks Insert a CD while the slot indicator blinks e After the CD is inserted the rest of the empty CD slots number blink e Repeat step 2 and 3 until all of the slots are loaded CAUTION e Insert a CD only while Insert Disc 1 6 is displayed and the slot indicator blinks e Don t insert two CDs for one oper ation Features of your vehicle Continued e Depending on the condition of Continued e If you disconnect the external CAUTION Using USB device To use the external USB device make sure the device is not con nected when starting the vehicle Connect the device after starting If you start the vehicle when the USB device is mounted it may damage the USB device USB is not ESA If the vehicle is started or turned off while the external USB device is connected the external USB device may not work It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files 1 It can only play MP3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps 320Kbps 2 It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps 320Kbps Take cautions for static electricity when connect or disconnect the external USB device Encoded MP3 PLAYER is not rec ognizable Continued the external USB device the con nected external USB device can be unrecognizable When the VHAPTTL byte sector setting of External USB devices is not either 512byte or 2048byte then the devic
95. the button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Select Phone 4 Say the name of the contact or the number of the contact 5 Say Yes x NOTICE The system may not function in the fol lowing cases If the phone is not found If the system does not recognize the voice command e Deleting phone The registered phones can be deleted 1 Press the button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Delete Phone 4 Say the name of the contact the num ber of the contact or Delete all phone 5 Say Yes Features of your vehicle e Changing Priority The connection priority for registered phones can be changed 1 Press the button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Change Priority 4 Say the name of the contact or the number of the contact 5 Say Yes e Turning Bluetooth on off Bluetooth function can be switched ON OFF initial status Bluetooth ON 1 Press the button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Bluetooth off 4 Say Yes e Turning Bluetooth on 1 Press the send or button 2 Say yes 3 The Bluetooth will be turned on m Phone Book e Adding Entry Phone numbers and voice tags can be registered Entries registered in the phone can also be transferred e Adding Entry by Voice Press the button Say phonebook Say add entry Say by voice Say the name of the contact Say yes Say the phone number Say store Say Home Office Mobile Other or default 10 Say Ye
96. the button to lock the anchor into position Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position Safety features of your vehicle B200A02NF C020106AUN Seat belts Front passenger and rear seat 3 point system with combination locking retractor To fasten your seat belt Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems Although a combina tion retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position it is strongly recommended that children always be seated in the rear seat NEVER place any infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle This type of seat belt combines the fea tures of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic lock ing retractor seat belt To fasten your seat belt pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle There will be an audible click when the tab locks into the buckle When not securing a child restraint the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver s seat belt Emergency Locking Retractor Type It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system the seat belt oper ation changes to allo
97. the engine com partment including high pressure water washing may cause the fail ure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electri cal electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them Waxing Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing Use a good quality liquid or paste wax and follow the manufacturer s instructions Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster Removing oil tar and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish Be sure to re wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing CAUTION e Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish Do not use steel wool abrasive cleaners or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome plated or anodized aluminum parts This may result in damage to the pro tective coating and cause discol oration or paint deterioration G230103AUN Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense x NOTICE If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement be sure the body shop applies anti corrosion materials to the parts repaired or
98. the glove box lamp to function warning to passing vehicles that the vehi cle door is open Features of your vehicle DEFROSTER CAUTION To prevent damage to the conduc tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window NOTICE a If you want to defrost and defog the Me D210600AUN front windshield refer to Windshield Vanity mirror lamp if equipped oe and defogging in this sec ion Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light OHM048085 D220100AEN Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to remove frost fog and thin ice from the rear window while the engine is running Se ae eve cereal Features of your vehicle To activate the rear window defroster press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the E Type A The front wiper deicer automatically turns off after 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off To turn off the deicer press the front wiper deicer but ton again defroster is ON If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window brush it off before oper ating the rear defroster The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off To tu
99. the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending r on the seat temperature C010107AHM Seat warmer if equipped A CAUTION e When cleaning the seats do not use an organic solvent such as thinner benzene alcohol and gasoline Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats To prevent overheating the seat warmer do not place blankets is not needed keep the switches in the cushions 21 IEE LONGED ln the OFF position seats while the seat warmer is in operation Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers Damage to the seat warming components could occur push either of the switches to warm the seat During mild weather or under conditions Safety features of your vehicle E Seat cooler S E Seat warmer passenger s seat OHM039061G C010109AHM Climate control seat if equipped The climate control seat is provided to cool or warm the driver s seat during hot or cold weather by blowing air through small vent hole on the surface of the seat and seatback While the engine is run ning push the left portion of the button to cool the driver s seat and push the right driver s seat or left passenger s seat portion of the button to warm the driver s seat or front passengers seat if equipped When the operation of the climate control seat is not needed keep the buttons in the OFF position e Each time you push the button
100. the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in order to improve the drivers view behind the vehi cle CAUTION When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing Se ee Features of your vehicle Indicator Sensor OHM048129 Indicator OHM048039 To operate the electric rearview mirror e Press the ON OFF button 1 to turn the automatic dimming function on The mirror indicator light will illuminate Press the ON OFF button to turn the automatic dimming function off The mirror indicator light will turn off The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is turned on D140105AEN EC Electric chromic mirror ECM with compass and HomeLink system if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Gentex Automatic Dimming Mirror with a Z Nav Electronic Compass Display and an Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System During nighttime driving this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehi cle is pointed The HomeLink Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door s electric gate home light ing etc 1 MOR SR4ESI6R 7 eas OHM048238N Channel 1 button Channel 2 button Status indicator LED Chann
101. the vehicle moves before the transfer is completed the vehicle may be damaged Driving your vehicle x NOTICE If the mode is not shifted like the previ ous instructions it will not transfer into the selected mode and the correspon ding indicator light will continuously q CAUTION 4WD e Always check the 4WD shift knob and cluster to see if the system has been activated unintentional E fa F 7 ih mf j A aa tis y OHM058010N P We OHMO05801 1 ly E170802AHM EU 4H 4L e Do not speed over 80 km h 50 Part time 4WD knob operation 1 Stop the vehicle ee site es Paa 40 km h 2H gt 4H 2 Put the shift lever into the N Neutral p i Turn the transfer knob from the 2H mode position to 4H mode or 4H mode to 2H mode at 3 Turn the transfer knob to the 4H or 4L the speed below 50 mph 80 km h It is position the N Neutral position Perform this the N Neutral position wait for the operation when driving straight There corresponding indicator light to turn on will be a few seconds of time delay or off in the cluster before shifting into the desired mode If the weather is extremely cold 15 C 5 F and the engine is not heated trans fer from 2H mode to 4H mode when the vehicle is stopped or at low speed Driving your vehicle E170900AHM EU Full Time 4WD Operation if equipped Transter mode Shitineb Indicator ih This mode is used when driving on normal ro
102. the warning light does not come on or continuously remains on after coming on for about 3 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the ON position the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not work ing properly If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an KIA authorized dealer as soon as possible This warning light will also illuminate if one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible If the warning light illuminates while driv ing reduce vehicle speed immediately and stop the vehicle Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting at the steering wheel Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehi cle s tire information placard D150332AHM TPMS Tire Pressure TPMS Monitoring System malfunction indicator TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position If the warning light does not come on or continuously remains on after coming on for about 3 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the ON position the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not working proper ly If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible The warning light also comes on and stays on when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System If this happens the system may not mon itor the tire pressure Have the system checked by an authorized KIA
103. theft alarm system is armed ENGINE START STOP button position E030701AHM OFF Not illuminated To turn off the engine START RUN posi tion or vehicle power ON position press the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the P Park posi tion When you press the ENGINE START STOP button without the shift lever in the P Park position the ENGINE START STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position Also the steering wheel locks when the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position to protect you against theft It locks when the door is opened or when you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder If the steering wheel is not locked prop erly when you open the driver s door the warning chime will sound Try locking the steering wheel again If the problem is not solved have it checked by an author ized KIA dealer In addition if the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position after the dri ver s door is opened the steering wheel will not lock and the warning chime will sound In such a situation close the door Then the steering wheel will lock and the warning chime will stop NOTICE If the steering wheel doesn t unlock properly the ENGINE START STOP button will not work Press the ENGINE START STOP button while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension A CAUTION You are able to turn off the engine START RUN or vehicle p
104. time 4WD operation or 4L 4H mode for part time 4WD operation steering control will be difficult Tight corner brake effect is a unique characteristic of four wheel drive vehicles caused by the difference in tire rotation of the four wheels and the zero degree alignment of the front wheels and sus pension Sharp turns at low speeds should be car ried out with caution Driving your vehicle E170800AHM EU Part Time 4WD if equipped a _ Sane eee This mode is used when driving on normal roads and highwa Gon AWD 4WD il 2H ofm t iil LOW Rear wheel drive not illuminated This mode is used when driving on slippery roads such as ve r AWD g ppery f EN snowy and rainy roads at normal speed High speed 7 ie HI 4 wheel drive 2 Maximum speed 80 km h 50 mph illuminated This mode is used when increased traction is required such as 4L 4WD climbing or descending hills driving off roads and towing a Low speed 7 Sa LOW vehicle 4 wheel drive G illuminated Maximum speed 40 km h 25 mph x NOTICE 4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob When the 4WD transfer mode is shifted it may cause mechanical noise It is not a mechanical failure but a normal condition J CAUTION When you stop the vehicle to transfer the shift knob wait until the corresponding indicator light turns on or off to depart If
105. tire pressures including the spare should be checked when the tires are cold Cold Tires means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 6 km one mile Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride vehicle handling and minimum tire wear For recommended inflation pressure refer to Tire and wheels in section 8 All specifications sizes and pres sures can be found on a label attached to the driver s side center pillar CAUTION Underinflation also results in excessive wear poor handling and reduced fuel economy Wheel deformation also is possible Keep your tire pres sures at the proper levels If a tire frequently needs refilling have it checked by an author ized KIA dealer Overinflation produces a harsh ride excessive wear at the center of the tire tread and a greater possibility of dam age from road hazards J CAUTION Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pres sures by 28 to 41 kPa 4 to 6 psi Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pres sure or the tires will be under inflated Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps Without the valve cap dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage If a valve cap is missing install a new one as soon as possible N CAUTION Tire pressure Always observe the following e Check tire pressure when the tires are co
106. to establish your compli ance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty amp Consumer Information manual Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an author ized KIA dealer An authorized KIA deal er meets KIA s high service quality stan dards and receives technical support from KIA in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction G020200AUN EU Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service may result in problems This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform As explained earlier in this section sev eral procedures can be done only by an authorized KIA dealer with special tools NOTICE Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warran ty coverage For details read the sepa rate Warranty amp Consumer Information manual provided with the vehicle If you re unsure about any serv icing or maintenance procedure have it done by an authorized KIA dealer Maintenance Meee eee OWNER MAINTENANCE GO30000AUN Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checks and amp 030101AHM inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized KIA dealer at aire oa
107. to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle s frame bumper system front end or side sheet metal or ride height this may affect the operation of your vehicle s air bag system Safety features of your vehicle OHM038042L OHM038043 OHM038044 C041200AUN EC Air bag warning label Air bag warning labels some required by the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards CMVSS are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system See eee Keys 4 3 Smart key 4 7 Remote keyless entry 4 10 Theft alarm system 4 13 Door locks 4 15 Tailgate 4 19 Windows 4 21 Hood 4 25 Features of your vehicle Fuel filler lid 4 27 Sunroof 4 30 Driver position memory system 4 34 Power adjustable pedals 4 36 Steering wheel 4 37 Mirrors 4 39 Instrument cluster 4 48 Rear parking assist system 4 68 Rearview camera 4 71 Hazard warning flasher 4 71 Lighting 4 72 Wipers and washers 4 77 Interior light 4 80 Defroster 4 83 Manual climate control system 4 85 Automatic climate control system 4 98 Windshield defrosting and defogging 4 109 Storage compartment 4 112 Interior features 4 115 Exterior feature 4 122 Audio system 4 124 Rear seat entertainment system RSE 4 154 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle _ KEYS OHM048230N OHM048231N D01010
108. train most devices follow these instructions 1 For first time programming press and hold the two outside buttons HomeLink Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds 2 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 2 8 cm 1 3 inches away from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter button DO NOT release the but tons until step 4 has been completed 4 While continuing to hold the buttons the red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink successfully trains to the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Release both buttons 5 Press and hold the _ just trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released 6 To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons follow steps 2 through 5 Rolling code programming Rolling code devices which are code protected and manufactured after 1996 may be determined by the following e Reference the device owner s manual for verification e The handheld transmitter appears to program the HomeLink Universal Transceiver but does not activate the
109. transmitter When the transmitter does not work properly open and close the door with the ignition key If you have a problem with the transmitter contact an author ized KIA dealer x NOTICE For transmitter replacement see an authorized KIA dealer to reprogram the transmitter CAUTION Keep the transmitter away from water or any liquid If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids it will not be covered by your manufactur er vehicle warranty This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance it will not be covered by your manufactur er s vehicle warranty Features of your vehicle m Type A B 1 Pry open the transmitter or smart key center cover CAUTION 2 Replace the battery with a new battery e The transmitter or smart key is CR2032 When replacing the battery designed to give you years of make sure the battery positive
110. unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds The hazard warning lights will blink twice again to indicate that all doors and tailgate are unlocked After pressing this button the doors and tailgate will be locked automatically unless you open any door within 30 sec onds D020104AHM Tailgate unlock 3 The tailgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked However after pressing this button the tailgate will lock automatically unless you open the tailgate within 30 seconds Also once the tailgate is opened and then closed the tailgate will lock auto matically D020105AHM Alarm 4 The horn sounds and the hazard warning lights flash for about 30 seconds if this button is pressed for more than 0 5 sec onds To stop the horn and lights press any button on the transmitter Features of your vehicle DO20200BHM EC Transmitter precautions NOTICE The transmitter will not work if any of the following occurs e The ignition key is in the ignition switch e You exceed the operating distance limit about 30 m 90 feet e The battery in the transmitter is weak Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal The weather is extremely cold The transmitter is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the
111. vehicle is in motion do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P Park posi tion If the traffic and road condi tions permit you may put the shift lever in the N Neutral position while the vehicle is still moving and press the ENGINE START STOP button in an attempt to restart the engine accelerator Driving your vehicle 6 OHM058002 NOTICE If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly you can start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder When you pull out the smart key from the smart key holder press the smart key and pull it out Continued Continued When the stop lamp fuse is blown you can t start the engine normally Replace the fuse with a new one If it is not possible you can start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC position The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine A CAUTION Do not press the ENGINE START STOP button for more than 10 sec onds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown Driving your vehicle AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION E060100AHM EU Automatic transmission operation The automatic transmission has 5 or 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed The individual speeds are selected auto matically depending on the position of the shift lever x NOTICE The first few shi
112. you should take extra care to prevent corrosion In winter hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over e When cleaning underneath the vehicle give particular attention to the compo nents under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view Do a thorough job just dampening the accu mulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it Water under high pres sure and steam are particularly effec tive in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials e When cleaning lower door panels rocker panels and frame members be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion Keep your garage dry Don t park your vehicle in a damp poorly ventilated garage This creates a favor able environment for corrosion This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow ice or mud Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with touch up paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of cor rosion If bare metal is showing through the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended Bird droppings
113. 0 64 Engine oil amp engins oiltiter 1 M 2 i oe ee ee ee Drive belts tension nn naa a E mt Cooling system hoses amp connections J fof C of ttt tt ft Engine coo mo E E a A E a M E Fuel fiter i tnt tn o Fuel tank cap lines EVAP canister and hoses w T E E RE kh Fuel tank air fiter iit nn th ht Air cleaner element o N O A O M o M i E i a o M i nition wires tt hh nn ht hm Spark plugs Iridium coated Replace every 160 000 km PCV valve if equipped E eE EE HL dle speed ant tt fs He Valve clearance 3 8L na ne nn nn A EE ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ga sss e e e e Maintenance MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CONT Chassis and body MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first INTERVALS x 1 000 km 1 000 km fea 72 88 128 MAINTENANCE 16 24 72 80 88 96 TEM as ao a4 8 a Air conditioner compressor operation amp refrigerant amount if equipped Exhaust pipes heat shield amp mountings Transfer case oil if equipped Front and rear differential fluid if equipped i iy R Front suspension ball joints Brakes fluid 1 i R Front brake pads amp discs 3 a ea Rear brake pads amp discs 3 l Parking brake Brake lines amp connections including booster Brake pedal free play Maintenance MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE CONT Chassis and body Continued MAINTENANCE Kilometers or time in months whichever comes first INTERVALS MAINTENANCE A 16 Ee ee hl
114. 0306AUN e High beam indicator This indicator illuminates when the head lights are on and in the high beam posi tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash to Pass position Se ee Features of your vehicle D150341AHM E Light on indicator a if equipped art The indicator illuminates when the tail lights or headlights are ON The indicator illuminates when the front fog lights ON D150309AUN Front fog light indicator if equipped D150307AHM Engine oil pressure warning light W7 This warning light indicates the engine oil pressure is low If the warning light illuminates while driv ing 1 Drive safely to the side of the road and stop 2 With the engine off check the engine oil level If the level is low add oil as required If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available call an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION If the engine is not stopped imme diately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated severe damage could result A CAUTION If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is run ning serious engine damage may result The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure In normal operation it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on then go out when the engine is started If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running there is a s
115. 0721 Gujarati 1314 Mongolian 1918 Serbian 0125 Aymara 0801 Hausa 1315 Moldavian 1919 Swati 0126 Azerbaijani 0809 1318 1920 Sesotho 0201 Bashkir 0818 Croatian 1319 Malay Sundanese 0207 Bulgarian 0825 Armenian 1325 Burmese 1923 Swahili 0208 Bihari Tamil 0214 Bengali 0911 Inupiak 1412 Dutch 2007 Tajik 0218 Breton 0919 Icelandic 1503 Occitan Tigrinya Corsican Hebrew 1518 Oriya 2012 Tagalog 0319 Czech 2014 Tswana 0401 Danish 1022 Javanese 1619 Pushto 2018 Turkish 0426 Bhutani 1111 Kazakh 1721 Quechua Tatar NIN OIO Co O O N o N NIN O O O 10O O1 OO 03 0 O on OO O NIN Ww 2020 0512 Greek Twi 0515 Esperanto 1114 Kannada 1815 Romanian 2118 Urdu 0519 Spanish 1115 Korean Russian 2126 Uzbek 0520 Estonian 1119 Kashmiri 1823 Kinyarwan 2209 Vietnamese 0521 Basque 1121 Kurdish 1901 da Sanskrit 2215 Volapuk 0601 Persian 1125 Kirghiz 1904 Sindhi 2315 Wolo 0609 Finnish 1201 Latin 1907 Sangho 2408 Xhosa 0610 Lingala 1908 Croation 2515 Yoruba 0615 Faroese 1215 Laotian 1909 Sinhalese 2608 Chinese 0618 French 1220 Lithuanian 1911 Slovak 2621 Zulu Features of your vehicle REAR Monitor Connentor Pin Layout REAR DVD Player Connector Pin Layout YDOOOOOVOGOOH HOSS SNH EES DOGYUOGCGOGYO OWMOSBUHOES ey OOOO OOOO Omi ODD DIe DIR REAR V CVBS NC RO GND REAR V CVBS NC NC FO_GND NC NC NC F AO L SG NC SG AUX_A_GND CANO_H REAR V GND GND AUX_AR_DE
116. 0AUN DO010200AHM Record your key number Key operations The key code number is stamped on the Used to start the engine bar code tag attached to the key set Used to lock and unlock the doors Should you lose your keys this number Used to lock and unlock the glove box will enable an authorized KIA dealer to duplicate the keys easily Remove the bar code tag and store it in a safe place Also record the code number and keep it in a safe place not in the vehicle See cece Features of your vehicle To deactivate the immobilizer sys x NOTICE tem a When starting the engine do not use the Insert the ignition key into the key cylin key with other immobilizer keys around der and turn it to the ON position Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon after it starts Keep each To activate the immobilizer system key separate in order to avoid a starting Turn the ignition key to the OFF position malfunction The immobilizer system activates auto matically Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle the engine will not start CAUTION Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may pre vent the engine from being started OHM048231N D010300AHM EC Immobilizer system Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use Your immobilizer system i
117. 1 Press the button 1 Press the button 5 Say yes 2 Say Call 2 Say Call 3 Say name 3 Say Number 4 Say lt John gt 4 Say lt digit number gt 6 Say lt at home gt 5 Say lt added digit number gt 7 Say yes 6 Say Dial X Tip Tip A shortcut to each of the following func A shortcut to each of the following func tions is available tions is available 1 Say Call name 1 Say Dial number 2 Say Call lt john gt 2 Say Dial lt digit gt 3 Say Call lt john at home gt Features of your vehicle m Receiving a phone call When receiving a phone call a ring tone is audible and the system changes into telephone mode When receiving a phone call the phone number and the message Incoming will be displayed e Do either one of the following Press the send switch to take the call Press the end switch to refuse the call e To adjust the ring volume push on the steering volume controls Volume adjustment cannot be made using the audio system or e To transfer a call to the phone The received call can be transferred from the hands free system to the cellu lar phone that is connected to Bluetooth For details please refer to you user s manual for the cellular phone or go to the Key matrix in this manual next page m Talking on the phone When talking on the phone the display will differ depending on whether or not the vehicle is in motion Number and a
118. 2 Tail Lamp Converter Tail 5A 0A RR P WIN RH Rear Power Window Relay RH UP DH Rear Power Window Motor RH DN 30A 0A Maintenance Engine compartment main fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected component ATIRR WASHER RAILER 5 TOP LAMP TOP SIGNAL RT DEICER ECM Injector 1 8 Camshaft Position Sensor 1 3 G8BA ECM Main Relay Relay Box Burglar Horn Relay Generator G8BA 15A__ TCM Maintenance Description Fuse rating Protected component RAM CTR P OUT FUSE 15A RR P OUT FUSE 15A FUEL DR FUSE 15A RR PWWIN LH FUSE 20A RR P WIN RH FUSE 20A LUGGAGE FUSE 7 5 RAM RR DEFOG FUSE 25A T G POWER LATCH FUSIBLE LINK 30A DOOR LOCK FUSE 15A RR WIPER FUSE 15A RAM AMP FUSIBLE LIMK 30A TRAILER 2 FUSIBLE LINK 30A IPM ILLUMI FUSE 7 5A DDM FUSIBLE LINK 30A FRT SWARMER FUSE 20A OBD II FUSE 7 5A SUNROOF FUSE 25A KEY LOCK FUSE 7 5A IPM MEMORY FUSE 7 5A DRIVER P SEAT FUSE 30A PASS P SEAT FUSE 20A RR S WARMER FUSE 20A ROOM FUSE 7 5A AUDIO FUSE 15A 4WD ECM AC inverter module Maintenance Engine compartment sub fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected component C FAN LOW C Fan Low Relay E BRAKE Trailer Electric Brake REAR BLOWER C FAN HI RAILER 1 Rear Blower Relay C Fan Hi Relay Trailer Relay RONT BLOWER Maintenance APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care G230101AUN Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any c
119. 57 1b TIRES SIZE OOL0 TIRE PRESSURE seed PHEU DIMENSION PRESSION A FROID ESSM aie tc LE GUID i Navy P2G TRIT 220KP A 32PS Fen tan _ p POUR OBTENIR AEAN peus T0RI 220KPA 32P5 ESTAR as ara RENSE GHEMEHTS SPARE IWF ORHATION gt See 117S 9RI7 420KPA 6OPS ADOITIOMNELS OHM059047 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEUS ET CHARGE NFORMAT ION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT 2 REARS WOMBIRE DE SIEGES TOTAL 7 AVANT gt ARRIERE 5 The coabined weight of eccupants ard carga should never emoeedse bg or 1 157 Ita Le poids combind dei occupants et du chargenent ne duit jamais exchders2 ky ou 1 157 Ib TIRES SIZE COLD TIRE SSURE REAN TER PREU DIMENS 04 PRESS 0M FROID SEF OWMFR S LAL ER LE 77 oer vk or GUIDE DU 4 pasenia 220KPA 3225 MA eects POUR OBTENMIR EAU PERV BRIG 220KPA 32PS 1 MBSR DES RENSE GHEMERTS INFORMATION Seuns TITRI A20KPA 60PS sett lane SS OHM059048N E150100AUN Tire and loading information label TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEUS ET CHARGE INFORMAT ION T SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FRONT 2 REAR 5 i WOMBRE DE SIEGES TOTAL 7 AVANT 2 ARRIERE 5 Tha combined weight of occupants and cargo should newer exceadiz4 ko or 1 157 Ibs Le pide cambind des pocopenia ef du chargement me deit jiemals encdders S kg oa 1 057 Ub PNEW_ DIMENSION PRESSION A FROID ESSN Rested pasami 220KPA 32PS Mema E a
120. 8102 e Air intake control button J OHMo48103 D240100AHM EU e Fan speed switch NOTICE tioning g manually while other functions operate Never place anything over the sensor The automatic climate control system is SOTA ANIGANY haces aa se are po T ensure petter Control o e heating an controlled by simply setting the desired cooling system j temperature For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control use The Full Automatic Temperature Control FATC system automatically controls the o ss n and set the temperature heating and cooling system as follows 1 Press the AUTO button The modes fan speeds air intake and air condi tioning will be controlled automatically by setting the temperature Features of your vehicle D240200AHM Manual heating and air condition ing The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pressing buttons other than the AUTO button In this case the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected 1 Start the engine 2 Set the mode to the desired position For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling Heating Na Cooling a 3 Set the temperature control to the desired position 4 Set the air intake control to the outside fresh air position 5 Set the fan speed control to the desired speed 6 If air conditioning is desired turn the air conditioning system on Press the AUTO button in order to con
121. A dealer according to the coolant The reservoir is filled at the fac Maintenance Schedule at the beginning 0 of this section Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder climate G070100AHM Checking the coolant level Maintenance G070101AHM For mixture percentage refer to the fol Recommended engine coolant lowing table e Use only soft distilled water in the coolant mixture e The engine in your vehicle has alu Ambient minum engine parts and must be pro Temperature tected by an ethylene glycol based Antifreeze coolant to prevent corrosion and freez ng e DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified Mixture Percentage volume ME OHM078003N coolant i Check the condition and connections of DO not use a solution that contains 45C 49 all cooling system hoses and heater more than 60 antifreeze or less than hoses Replace any swollen or deterio 35 antifreeze which would reduce rated hoses the effectiveness of the solution The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool If the coolant level is low add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion Bring the level to F but do not overfill If frequent additions are required see an authorized KIA dealer for a cooling syst
122. ACC or ON f the knob is turned clockwise counter clockwise the volume will increase decrease 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button e When the TRACK V is pressed it will automatically tune to the next lower station When the SEEK A is pressed it will automatically tune to the next higher station 4 SCAN Selection Button e When the button is pressed it auto matically scans the radio stations upwards The SCAN feature steps through each station starting from the initial station for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel 5 Preset Selection Button Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec ond to play the station saved in each button Press 1 6 button more than 0 8 sec ond or longer to save the current station to the respective button with a beep 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob If the Knob is turned clockwise counter clockwise the frequency will increase decrease AM 10kHz FM 200kHz m Audio Setup MODE Press and Rotate AUDIO repeatedly to choose the desired mode Each press changes the mode as below Hierarchy 4 AUTO VOLUME CON TROL mode is only selected in the CDP e Hierarchy 1 e Hierarchy 2 Features of your vehicle e Hierarchy 3 For example To Adjusting FADER 7 MUTE Button CDP ONLY e Press AUDIO to activate SETUP Press MUTE to stop the sound and mode then Hierarchy 1 is selected
123. ACTURE SHOWN ABON VIN OENO56020 E150200AUN Certification label The certification label is located on the driver s door sill at the center pil lar This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle This is called the GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occupants fuel and cargo This label also tells you the maxi mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles called Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center line Driving your vehicle The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment A CAUTION your vehicle can carry e Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would l a not be covered by your warran If you carry items inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or ee NOUN en Cad VOUT VERGIES anything else they are moving as e Using heavier suspension com fast as the vehicle If you have to stop ponents to get added durability or turn quickly or if there is a crash might not change your weight the items will keep going and can ratings Ask your dealer to help cause an injury if they strike the driv you load your vehicle the right er or a passenger
124. AUTO 4H Turn the transfer knob from the AUTO mode to 4H mode or 4H mode to AUTO mode at the speed below 80 km h 50 mph It is not necessary to put the shift lever into the N Neutral position Perform this operation when driving straight There will be a few seconds of time delay before shifting into the desired mode If the weather is extremely cold 15 C 5 F and the engine is not heated trans fer from AUTO mode to 4H mode when the vehicle is stopped or at low speed a B m4 l p N pg eo accu NY Se a ann AA al wit a Taina Y ws Se OHM058013 4H lt gt 4L 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Put the shift lever into the N Neutral position 3 Turn the transfer knob to the 4H or 4L position 4 Before shifting to other ranges from the N Neutral position wait for the corresponding indicator light to turn on or off in the cluster NOTICE If the mode is not shifted like the previ ous instructions it will not transfer into the selected mode and the correspon ding indicator light will continuously blink CAUTION Mud or snow e Always check the 4WD shift knob and cluster to see if the system has been activated unintentional ly e Do not speed over 80 km h 50 mph in the 4H mode and 40 km h 25 mph in the 4L mode Driving your vehicle E170300AHM EC For safe four wheel drive opera tion HILL1 HILL2 e When you are driving up or down hills drive as str
125. Battery in this section e Even though the memory fuse is pulled out the battery can still be dis charged by operation of the head lights or other electrical devices G210101AHM Memory fuse SHUNT connector Your vehicle is equipped with a memory fuse SHUNT connector to prevent bat tery discharge if your vehicle is parked without being operated for prolonged periods Use the following procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods 1 Turn off the engine B 2 Turn off the headlights and tail lights aa 3 Open the driver s side panel cover and Engine compartment fuse pull out the memory fuse SHUNT replacement connector 1 Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off 2 Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up F Maintenance 3 Check the removed fuse replace it if it is blown To remove or insert the fuse use the fuse puller in the engine com partment fuse panel 4 Push in a new fuse of the same rating and make sure it fits tightly in the clips If it fits loosely consult an authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment securely install the fuse panel cover If not electrical failures may occur from water contact G210201AUN Main fuse If the main fuse is blown it must be removed as follows 1 Disconnect the negative battery cable 2 Remove the nuts shown in the picture above 3
126. C is operating The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when either the ESC is turned off with the button or ESC fails to operate when turned on A CAUTION Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction When replacing tires make sure they are the same size as your original tires E070504AEN EU ESC OFF usage When driving e It s a good idea to keep the ESC turned on for daily driving whenever possible e To turn ESC off while driving press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating ESC indicator light blinks If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat ing the vehicle may slip out of control x NOTICE When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer ensure that the ESC is turned off ESC OFF light illuminat ed If the ESC is left on it may pre vent the vehicle speed from increas ing and result in false diagnosis Turning the ESC off does not affect ABS or brake system operation Driving your vehicle E070505AHM EU x NOTICE Hill start assist control HAC e The HAC does not operate when the if equipped transmission shift lever is in the P A vehicle has the tendency to slip back Park or N Neutral position on a steep hill when it starts to go after The HAC activates even though the stopping The Hill start Assist Control ESC is off but it does not activate HAC prevents the vehicle from slipping
127. CD version 2 0 discs the PBC function can be turned ON or OFF 8 INPUT button The desired track can be inputted for play 9 PBC setting display The PBC ON or PBC OFF is displayed in accordance to PBC setting 10 TRACK number display The current track number is displayed 11 Play time display The play time of the current VCD is dis played 12 END button The VCD menu screen will be removed so that the video can be viewed in Full Screen 13 MENU button The interactive menu encoded on the VCD is displayed This menu is displayed only when the PBC is set to ON ina Video CD version 2 0 DISC Features of your vehicle Using the PBC function What is the PBC Play Back Control function e This function allows the various infor mation stored on the Video CD to be viewed by using the interactive menu encoded on a MPEG1 version 2 0 Video CD discs e The PBC function is supported only in Video CD version 2 0 discs X NOTICE e The PBC function may operate differ Selecting lt gt will display the set menus ently in accordance to the manufactur of the previous or next page ing conditions on the Video CD version 2 0 disc 4 The selected menu will be applied h Select the PBC button on the VCD NOTICE operation screen while playing The PBC will return to OFF state if a different DISC is inserted the power or 2 If the PBC ON is displayed at the top ignition is turned ON OFF while in PBC side of
128. CH compatible child restraint seats LATCH stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats OHM038045N Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indi cate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints Safety features of your vehicle Also test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it Tilt the seat from side to side Also try to tug the seat for ward Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place N CAUTION Do not allow the rear seat belt web bing to get scratched or pinched by the child seat latch and LATCH anchor during the installation OHM038046N LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions Their locations are shown in the illustration There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH compatible attachments Once you have installe
129. E will appear on the LCD 4 DVD AUX2 Selection Button In the event there is a DVD inserted and an auxiliary device is connected to the RSE system pressing the DVD AUX2 button will switch between DVD and AUX2 modes Features of your vehicle SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO E Type A 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button s9 3 Preset Selection Button Auxruse 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button 7 INFO Selection Button 1 2 ROM 3 scrou 4 5 wer 6 VOLUME A 200HMU Features of your vehicle E Type B 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button in 3 Preset Selection Button D AUX USB 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button 7 INFO Selection Button 2 ROM 3 scrou CK VOLUME A 300HMU Features of your vehicle E Type C 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button CD AUX 3 Preset Selection Button 9 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button 7 INFO Selection Button o Su A 350HMU Features of your vehicle How to Use SIRIUS Satellite Radio Your Kia vehicle is equipped with 3 months complimentary period of SIRIUS Satellite Radio so you have access to over 130 channels of music information and entertainment programming Activation In order to extend or
130. E070201AHM Applying the parking brake To engage the parking brake first apply the foot brake and then depress the park ing brake pedal down as far as possible In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on an incline the shift lever should be in the P Park position A CAUTION Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear Driving your vehicle OHM058022 E070202AHM Releasing the parking brake To release the parking brake depress the parking brake pedal a second time while applying the foot brake The pedal will automatically extend to the fully released position If the parking brake pedal does not release or does not release all the way have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer OC BRAKE Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON do not start the engine This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the igni tion switch in the START or ON position Before driving be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running there may be a mal function in the brake system Immediate attention is necessary If at all possible cease driving the vehi cle immediately If that is not possible use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to d
131. FF indicator on the center facia panel This system detects the conditions 1 4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly sitting upright with the seat in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfort ably extended feet on the floor and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the seat belt e The ODS Occupant Detection System may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the detection system These include 1 Failing to sit in an upright position 2 Leaning against the door or center console 3 Sitting towards the sides or the front of the seat 4 Putting legs on the dashboard or rest ing them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat 5 Improperly wearing the seat belt 6 Reclining the seat back See eee cee od Safety features of your vehicle C040301AHM Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system Indicator Warning light Condition detected by the occupant passENGER AIR l i Front passenger detection system BAG OFF indicator SRS warning na ba g 1 Adult or child age 13 and up a Activated 2 Infant or child restraint system Deactivated with 12 months old 3 Unoccupie
132. Features of your vehicle SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO WITH BLUETOOTH E Type A 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button 3 Preset Selection Button 1 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button D 7 INFO Selection Button PA910HMU DCP Features of your vehicle E Type B gt Sae 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button LOAD 2 Channel Selection Button ini 3 Preset Selection Button AUX USB 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button osc ROM 3 c CAT j A o CAT FOLDER Button 4 DISC 5 eer FOLDER as een A 7 INFO Selection Button VOLUME PA960HMU CDC Features of your vehicle E Type C OBwetvoth Gis 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button d CD AUX 3 Preset Selection Button 4 SCAN Selection Button 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button 6 CAT FOLDER Button 7 INFO Selection Button 2 Channel Selection Button FOLDER v PA965HMU Features of your vehicle How to Use SIRIUS Satellite Radio Your Kia vehicle is equipped with 3 months complimentary period of SIRIUS Satellite Radio so you have access to over 130 channels of music information and entertainment programming Activation In order to extend or reactivate your sub scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio you will need to contact SIRIUS Customer Care at 888 539 7474 Have your 12 digit SID Sirius Identif
133. G051600AHM Brake fluid Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir The level should be between MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification G051700AUN Parking brake Inspect the parking brake system includ ing the parking brake pedal and cables G051900AUN Brake discs pads calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear discs for run out and wear and calipers for fluid leakage G052000AUN Exhaust pipe and muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes muf fler and hangers for cracks deterioration or damage Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary G052100AUN Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage Retighten to the specified torque Maintenance ee G052200AUN Steering gear box linkage amp boots lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off check for excessive free play in the steering wheel Check the linkage for bends or damage Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration cracks or damage Replace any damaged parts G052300AEN Power steering pump belt and hoses Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage Replace any damaged or leaking parts immedi ately Inspect the power steering belt or drive belt for evid
134. IUS mode Pressing the SIRIUS key will change the mode in SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIR IUS3 SIRIUS1 order SIRIUS mode menu screen configura tion SIRIUSR O21 THE SPECTRUM JAZZ amp POP THE CARPAL TUNNEL OF LOVE 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIRIUS3 mode 2 PRESET button The station can be easily selected by storing the desired station in advance 3 CHANNEL Search button The channels within the category are changed All of the channels will be searched when set to ALL Category When in CAT SEARCHING mode search will be done only for the current category 4 CATEGORY UP DOWN Search but ton This button will conduct a cyclic search of the CATEGORY The current channel will be maintained during the search 5 ENTER button This button will change the channel to the desired channel 6 SAT button The SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIRIUS3 modes are changed 7 INFORMATION button This button will display the INFORMA TION pop up window for the current broadcast 8 SCAN button This button scans the channels within the current Category Features of your vehicle 9 Channel name Channel name display The NUMBER and Channel name of the current channel are displayed 10 CATEGORY display The name of the current category is dis played 11 SONG TITLE display The title and broadcast title of the current song are displayed Methods of Frequency selection Selec
135. KIA THE COMPANY Congratulations Your selection of a KIA was a wise investment It will give you years of driving pleasure Now that you are the owner of a KIA vehicle you ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like What is a KIA Who is KIA What does KIA mean Here are some answers First KIA is the oldest car company in Korea It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on building high quality vehicles at affordable prices The first syllable KI in the word KIA means to arise from to the world or to come up out of to the world The second syllable a means Asia So the word KIA means to arise from or to come up out of Asia to the world Drive safely and enjoy your Kia FOREWORD i Thank you for choosing a KIA vehicle When you require service remember that your KIA dealer knows your vehicle best Your dealer has factory trained tech nicians recommended special tools genuine KIA replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction Because subsequent owners require this important information as well this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold This manual will familiarize you with operational mainte nance and safety information about your new vehicle It 1s sup plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warrantie
136. LE PEDALS I F EQUIPPED D310100AHM Setting the adjustable pedal posi tion 1 Be sure the parking brake is engaged 2 Move the accelerator and brake ped als to the front most position by press ing the W portion of the switch 3 Adjust the seat position and the steer ing wheel angle properly 4 Move the pedals toward you until you can fully depress the brake pedal by pushing the portion of the switch 5 Depress the pedals a few times to get used to the pedals after the adjustment Features of your vehicle STEERING WHEEL D130100AHM EU Power steering Power steering uses energy from the engine to assist you in steering the vehi cle If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative the vehicle may still be steered but it will require increased steering effort Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation have the power steer ing checked by an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or left for more than 5 seconds with the engine running Holding the steering wheel for more than 5 seconds in either position may cause damage to the power steering pump x NOTICE If the power steering drive belt breaks or if the power steering pump malfunc tions the steering effort will greatly increase x NOTICE If the vehicle is parked for extended periods outside in cold weather below
137. M RSE IF EQUIPPED Important Safety Information Please read the following for safety pre cautions CAUTION Ignoring the cautions listed within this user manual may lead to acci dents or injury Cautions indicate matters which may lead to vehicle damage or malfunction x NOTICE Information which the user must observe in order to prevent vehicle dam age or malfunction Warnings which must be observed in the case of vehicle malfunction Information which the user must have prior knowledge Information which allows for more con venient operation Closely observe and comply with the fol lowing cautions before using the product All problems which occur in violation of the following will not be the responsibility of the manufacturer For user and passenger safety please read the user manual carefully before using the product 1 Do not disassemble assemble or modify the AVN system 2 Set the volume to a level which allows the driver to be aware of external con ditions 3 Do not operate the AVN system for prolonged periods of time with the vehicle ignition turned off Such opera tions may lead to battery discharge 4 Be cautious not to spill water or intro duce foreign objects into the device 5 Opening the Roof Monitor with exces sive force may lead to damage 6 In case of product malfunction please contact your place of purchase or After Service center CAUTION When cleaning this p
138. N Button 13 CD Loading Button a CD Number Indicator field b CD Slot indicator a 4 LOAD O20900 cD o0 AUX US8 O ON Oost OON 00009 PA960HMU CDC a nt yl Features of your vehicle E Type B CD Loading Slot CD Eject Button RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button CD Indicator CD Selection Button SCAN Play Button Track File Search Knob and ENTER x Button 10 FOLDER Search Button 7 3 11 INFORMATION Button ths 12 DISC UP DOWN Button 13 CD Loading Button a CD Number Indicator field b CD Slot indicator ie Edise W LOAD A CD AUX O OnN Oa FWD 9206 PA965HMU Features of your vehicle How to Activate CDP CD CHANGER 1 CD Loading Slot e Please place the CD with the printed side upward and then gently push in e CDP models support both 8cm and 12 cm CDs e CDC models support only 12 cm CD e If VCD Data CD DVD are loaded MEDIA ERROR message will appear and the CD will eject N CAUTION Don t insert a CD if CD indicator is illuminated in the CDP 2 CD Eject Button e Press this button to eject the CD during CD playback e If there is no CD in the deck NO DISC will be displayed for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode x ALL EJECT CDC ONLY Press this button for more than 0 8 second to eject
139. Op Tor o the frequencies indicated to help ensure SC the engine oll level safe dependable operation of your vehi Check the coolant level in the coolant cle reservoir Any adverse conditions should be Check the windshield washer fluid brought to the attention of your dealer as level soon as possible e Look for low or under inflated tires These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor parts and lubricants used See E J Maintenance E G030102AHM While operating your vehicle Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle Check for vibrations in the steering wheel Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel or change in its straight ahead position Notice if your vehicle constantly turns Slightly or pulls to one side when trav eling on smooth level road When stopping listen and check for unusual sounds pulling to one side increased brake pedal travel or hard to push brake pedal If any slipping or changes in the oper ation of your transmission occurs check the transmission fluid level Check the automatic transmission P Park function Check the parking brake Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle water dripping from the air condition ing system during or after use is nor mal G030103AHM At least monthly e Check the coolant level
140. Pod cable when an iPod device is not being used Features of your vehicle AUX mode auxiliary device input pat A CAUTION 1 Having the auxiliary cable con nected even when there is no auxiliary device can convert the device into AUX mode and cause noise Please make sure to remove the i auxiliary cable when an auxiliary Starting AUX mode by use of Rear device is not being used panel 2 Connecting an auxiliary device to 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR the cigarette jack and playing panel to display the MODE selection through the screen of the device screen may cause an occurrence of noise If such noise occurs remove the power cable from the cigarette Jack NOTICE The AUX1 AUX2 mode will operate only when an auxiliary AUDIO amp VIDEO player camcorder vehicle VCR etc is connected and operating 2 lf the key on the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode NOTICE If the auxiliary device connector jack is 3 Select the AUX button removed while in AUX mode the previ ous mode will automatically be dis played 4 ripe neta AUX2 button in the Pressing the AUX1 AUX2 button while the auxiliary device is not is not connect ed or with only the VIDEO jack connect 5 The AUX1 AUX2 will begin playing ed will display a The device is not prop erly con
141. RACK UP DOWN button Features of your vehicle D300202AHM MODE 3 Press the button to select Radio CD compact disc AUX or USB iPod If there is no CD or the auxiliary device is not connected the mode may not be converted to the CD AUX or USB iPod mode D300205AHM MUTE 4 e Pull the MUTE button to cancel the sound e Pull the MUTE button again to activate the sound Detailed information for audio control buttons is described in the following pages in this section OHM048151 D300600AHM EE Aux USB and iPod if equipped If your vehicle has an aux and or USB universal serial bus port or iPod port you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod port to plug in an iPod x NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet noise may occur during playback If this happens use the power source of the portable audio device iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc Features of your vehicle FM reception JBMo01 D300800AHM How vehicle audio works AM MW LW and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers locat ed around your city They are intercept ed by the radio antenna on your vehicle This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best pos sib
142. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating 4 Reinstall in the reverse order of removal x NOTICE If the main fuse is blown consult an authorized KIA dealer Maintenance G210300AHM EU Fuse relay panel description Inside the fuse relay panel covers you can find the fuse relay label describing fuse relay name and capacity Inner fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehi cle It is accurate at the time of printing When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle refer to the fuse panel label Maintenance Inner fuse panel Instrument panel Description Fuse rating Protected component AUDIO 15A MEMORY 7 5A Front A C Control Module Rear A C Control Module Instrument Cluster IND RF Receiver FAM RAM Driver Door Module Assistant Door Module Tilt amp Telescopic Module IMS Control Module Front A C Control Module Incar Temperature Sensor PDM Multifunction Switch Wiper Washer IG2 1 7 5A Driver Passenger Seat Warmer Module Front Blower Relay Electro Chromic Mirror Rear Blower Relay AC Inverter Switch Trailer Relay C FAN HI LOW Relay Rear A C Control Module Driver Door Module FAM Assistant Door Module IMS Control Module IG2 2 Tilt amp Telescopic Module Smart Key Control Module Fob Holder 7 5A Electronic Chrome Mirror Map Lamp Vanity Lamp Switch LH RH Front Rear A C Control Module Center Room L
143. T NC 6 D MIX R 18 D MIX GND 6 FI_GND NC D MIX L SG F AIN_R NC zee FGND SG eS AUX V GND ILL 9 CANO_H CANO_L E REAR v GND ACC ILL NC NC B NC NGC R AO_L GND B NC R AO_R CANO_L F AO_R NC AUX_AR NC AUX_AL NC AUX_AL_DET We F AIN_L NC AUX_V NC Features of your vehicle REAR Keyboard Connector Pin Layout Product Specification Power Voltage Dimensions WxHxD Weight Rear Monitor 14 4V 10 15V possible Negative ground 360 x 230 x 40 mm 2 19 kg Rear Kyeboard 14 4V 10 15V possible Negative ground 169 x 64 x 93 2 mm 365 g 09000000 ODOT TLO DVD Player 14 4V 10 15V possible Negative ground 178 x 54 x 181 2mm 1 39 kg SG CAO_H NC Auto Light ALT 6 ILL ACC a B gt NC CANO_L NC GND NC me NC 16 NC Before driving 5 3 Key positions 5 4 ENGINE START STOP button 5 6 Starting the engine 5 9 Automatic transmission 5 12 Four wheel drive 4WD 5 18 Brake system 5 27 Cruise control system 5 39 Economical operation 5 45 Special driving conditions 5 47 Winter driving 5 51 Driving your vehicle Trailer towing 5 54 Vehicle load limit 5 63 Vehicle weight 5 68 Driving your vehicle E010000AUN A WARNING ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous If at any time you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle open the win dows immediately e Do not inhale exhaust fumes Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide a col
144. To store the spare tire loosen the bolt enough to lower ground continue to turn the 4 Lay the tire on the ground with the the spare tire wrench counterclockwise and valve stem facing up Turn the wrench counterclockwise draw the spare tire outside Never 5 Place the wheel under the vehicle until the spare tire reaches the rotate the wrench excessively oth and install the retainer 1 through ground erwise the spare tire carrier may the wheel center be damaged l 3 Turn the wrench clockwise until it 5 Remove the retainer 1 from the clicks center of the spare tire What to do in an emergenc y 1VQA4022 F070300BHM EU Changing tires 1 Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly 2 Place the transmission shift lever in P Park 3 Activate the hazard warning flash er nee 1VQA4023 4 Remove the wheel lug nut wrench jack jack handle and spare tire from the vehicle 5 Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position What to do in an emergenc OHM068009 6 Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun terclockwise one turn each but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground 7 Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tire you are changing Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised
145. Type A If any method other than the CRUISE ON OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated the most recent set speed will automatically resume when the RES switch is pushed Type B If any method other than the CRUISE ON OFF switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever up to RES It will not resume however if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 40 km h 25 mph Seance ed Driving your vehicle E090700BHM To turn cruise control off do one of the following e Pull or press the CRUISE ON OFF switch the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off e Turn the ignition off Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation If you want to resume the cruise control operation repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on the previous page Driving your vehicle ECONOMICAL OPERATION E100000AHM EC Your vehicle s fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving where you drive and when you drive Each of these factors affects how many kilometers miles you can get from a liter gallon of fuel To operate your vehicle as economically as possible use the fol lowing driving suggestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs e Drive smoothly Accelerate at a moder ate rate Don t make j
146. UIREMENTS A020101AHM EU Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number R M 2 of 87 Research Octane Number 91 or higher Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL as well as minimize exhaust emis sions and spark plug fouling CAUTION Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified Consult an authorized KIA dealer for details A020103AUN EU Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Gasohol a mixture of gasoline and ethanol also known as grain alcohol and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol also known as wood alcohol are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline Do not use gasohol containing more than 10 ethanol and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol Either of these fuels may cause drivability prob lems and damage to the fuel system Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufactur ers warranty if they result from the use of 1 Gasohol containing more than 10 ethanol 2 Gasoline or methanol 3 Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol gasohol containing Introduction OO eee E85 fuel is an alternative fuel com prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per cent gasoline and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles
147. Way Driving your vehicle VEHICLE WEIGHT E160000AUN This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the fol lowing terms for determining your vehi cle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s specifications and the certification label E160100AUN Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equip ment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment E160200AUN Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment E160300AUN Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment E160400AUN GAW Gross axle weight This is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload E160500AUN GAWR Gross axle weight rating This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the certification label The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR E160600AUN GVW Gross vehicle weight Th
148. While the vehicle is moving backward the outside rearview mirror s will move downward to aid reverse parking According to the position of the outside rearview mirror switch 1 the outside rearview mirror s will operate as follows L R When the remote control outside rearview mirror switch is selected to the L left or R right position both outside rearview mirrors will move downward Features of your vehicle Neutral When the remote control out side rearview mirror switch is placed in the middle position the outside rearview mirrors will not operate while the vehi cle is moving backward x NOTICE The outside rearview mirrors will auto matically revert to their original posi tions under the following conditions 1 Ignition switch is in the LOCK posi tion 2 Shift lever is moved to any position except R 3 Remote control outside rearview mir ror switch is placed in the middle position OHM048033N D310000AHM EE You may adjust the position of the accel erator and brake pedals by pressing the switch The position of the pedals can be adjust ed in any position of the ignition switch But the transmission shift lever must be in the P Park position when the ignition switch is in the ON position e If you press the portion of the switch the pedals will move toward the driver e If you press the portion of the switch the pedals will move away from the driver POWER ADJUSTAB
149. ack rabbit starts or full throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed Don t race between stoplights Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don t have to change speeds unnecessarily Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnec essary braking This also reduces brake wear e Drive at a moderate speed The faster you drive the more fuel your vehicle uses Driving at a moderate speed especially on the highway is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel con sumption Don t ride the brake pedal This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components In addition driving with your foot rest ing on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences Take care of your tires Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure Incorrect inflation either too much or too little results in unnecessary tire wear Check the tire pressures at least once a month Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces Poor align ment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption Keep your vehicle in good condition For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs maintain your vehi cle in accordance with t
150. ads and highway AUTO D 4WD The engine power is distributed to all four wheels automatical Automatic a LOW ly without the driver s intervention in accordance with the road 4 wheel drive conditions and driving conditions not illuminated This mode is used when driving on slippery roads such as 4H ff TO 4wD snowy and rainy roads at normal speed High speed ap HI 4 wheel drive Me Maximum speed 80 km h 50 mph illuminated This mode is used when increased traction is required such as AL l 4WD climbing or descending hills driving off roads and towing a Low speed iF LOW vehicle 4 wheel drive G illuminated Maximum speed 40 km h 25 mph x NOTICE 4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob When the 4WD transfer mode is shifted it may cause mechanical noise It is not a mechanical failure but a normal condition J CAUTION When you stop the vehicle to transfer the shift knob wait until the corresponding indicator light turns on or off to depart If the vehicle moves before the transfer is completed the vehicle may be damaged Driving your vehicle i b h p F F r Ai TE rat ey oe i zW W L a i T l T n Scns I aT r E al s So tab p bf iv pig ians eee ys 1y ee yf Res aa P y OHM058012N a m E170902AHM EU Full time 4WD knob operation
151. agnosis If you don t hear an audible warning sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit tently when shifting the gear to the R Reverse position this may indicate a malfunction in the rear parking assist sys tem If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible Features of your vehicle REARVIEW CAMERA IF EQUIPPED HAZARD WARNING FLASHER 3 The rearview camera may be turned off by pressing the ON OFF button 1 when the rearview camera is activated To turn the camera on again press the ON OFF button 1 again when the igni tion switch is ON and the shift lever in R Reverse position Also the camera will turn on automatically whenever the igni tion switch is turned off and on again D180000AHM The hazard warning flasher should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the vehicle in a hazardous location When you must make such an emer gency stop always pull off the road as far as possible The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch Both turn signal lights will blink The hazard warning lights will operate even though The rearview camera will activate when the key is not in the ignition switch the back up light is ON with the ignition To turn the hazard warning lights off switch ON and the shift lever in the R push the switch again Reverse position This system is a supplemental system that shows behind of the vehicle throu
152. aight as possible Use extreme caution in going up or down steep hills since you may flip your vehicle over depending on the grade terrain and water mud conditions e Do not try to drive in deep standing water or mud since such conditions can stall your engine and clog your exhaust pipes Do not drive down steep hills since it requires extreme skill to maintain control of the vehicle Seana cee cal Driving your vehicle e You must consciously take the effort to learn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle Do not rely on your experience in con ventional 2WD vehicles in choosing safe cornering speed in 4WD mode For starters you must drive more slow ly in 4WD Drive carefully off road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees Become familiar with the off road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving e If you need to drive in the water stop your vehicle set your transfer to the 4L mode and drive at less than 5 mph 8 e Always hold the steering wheel firmly when you are driving off road e Make sure all passengers are wearing seat belts Driving your vehicle x NOTICE Do not drive in water if the level is higher than the bottom of the vehicle e Check your brake condition once you are out of mud or water Press the brake pedal several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking forces return e Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you
153. all discs inside the decks in the respective order 3 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RDM mode and more than 0 8 second to activate ALL RDM mode e RDM Only files tracks in a folder disc are played in random sequence e ALL RDM MP3 WMA Only All files tracks in a folder disc are played in random sequence 4 Automatic Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current track file Press again within 1 seconds to return to the previous track file Press and hold TRACK V to initiate rewind search Press SEEK A for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance the next track file Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 5 REPEAT Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RPT mode and more than 0 8 second to activate FLD RPT mode e RPT Only a track file is played repeatedly e FLD RPT MP3 WMA Only Only files in a folder are played repeatedly 6 CD Indicator CDP ONLY When the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position and if the CD is loaded this indicator is illuminated 7 CD Selection Button e If the CD is loaded turns to CD mode e If there is no Disc in the deck it dis plays NO DISC for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode 8 SCAN Selection Button Plays back the first 10 seconds of each song in the CD a ent yal Features of your vehicle 9 Track File S
154. amp Rear Room Lamp 7 5A Sport Mode Switch Ignition Lock Switch 7 5A 7 0A OBD II 7 5A ROOM KEY LOCK LLUMI RR S WARMER RT S WARMER UNROOF TPMS PEDAL PWR OUTLET TILT amp TELE PASS P SEAT DRIVER P SEAT Rear Seat Warmer Relay 20A Rear Seat Warmer Relay 20A Driver Seat Warmer Module Passenger Seat Warmer Module 25A Sunroof Module 0A OA 75A 15A 15A 30A 75A gt Q O Maintenance Description Fuse rating Protected component TART Burglar Alarm Relay Start Relay AIR BAG IND Instrument Cluster Air Bag IND 75A ABS Control Module ESC Control Module DBC Relay Steering Angle Sensor Crash Pad Switch LH l Smart Key Control Module Rear Parking Assist Control Module Rheostat Instrument Cluster MICOM Multifunction Switch Cruise Remocon Generator Rear Parking Assist Buzzer Rear Parking Assist Switch Audio PODS Module Tire Pressure Monitoring Module 75A Multipurpose Check Connector ECM TCM Front Wiper Motor 4WD ECM Stop Lamp Switch Free Running Differential Air Pump Generator G8BA 15A SRS Control Module Telltale Lamp 30A Driver Door Module Driver Safety Power Window Motor 30A Assistant Door Module Passenger Safety Power Window Motor Maintenance Inner fuse panel Luggage compartment FUSE Fuse rating Circuit Protected RR DEFOG IG POWER LATCH RR WIPER DOOR LOCK CTR POUT RR PIOUT UEL DR RAILERS AR PIWIN LH UGGAGE 7 5A Luggage Lamp AMP SOA JAM O RAILER
155. and stop the engine Arm the system as described below 1 Remove the ignition key from the igni tion switch and exit the vehicle 2 Make sure that all doors and tailgate and engine hood are closed and latched 3 Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system or smart key After completion of the steps above the hazard warning lights will blink for smart key the chime also sounds once to indi cate that the system is armed If any door or tailgate or engine hood remains open the hazard warning lights will not operate and the theft alarm will not arm If all doors and tailgate and engine hood are closed after the lock button is pressed the hazard warning lights will blink once The system can also be armed or dis armed by locking or unlocking the doors with the key from the front doors howev er the hazard warning lights will not blink using this method Do not arm the system until all pas sengers have left the vehicle If the system is armed while a passenger s remains in the vehicle the alarm may be activated when the remaining pas senger s leaves the vehicle If any door or tailgate or engine hood is opened within 30 seconds after the system enters the armed stage the system will be disarmed to prevent unnecessary alarm See eee Seca Features of your vehicle D030200AHM EU Theft alarm stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is
156. anges to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine Shift to P position If you try to turn off the engine without the shift lever in the P Park position the ENGINE START STOP button will change to the ACC position If the button is pressed once more it will turn to the ON position The warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds to indicate that you should press the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the P Park position to turn off the engine Remove key When you turn off the engine with the smart key in the smart key holder the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds Also the smart key holder light blinks for about 10 seconds To remove the smart key push the smart key once and pull it out from the smart key holder Features of your vehicle Insert key If you press the ENGINE START STOP button while Key is not detected illumi nates on the LCD display the warning Insert key illuminates for about 10 sec onds Also the immobilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for about 10 seconds Press start button again If you can not operate the ENGINE START STOP button when there is a problem with the ENGINE START STOP button system the warning illuminates for 10 second
157. ants and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight or load limit including occupants and cargo the vehicle can carry Se Se eae ciel Driving your vehicle E150103AHM Towing capacity Without trailer brakes 750 kg 1650 Ibs With trailer brakes e 3 8 Engine 2270 kg 5000 Ibs e 4 6 Engine 3400 kg 7500 Ibs Towing capacity is the maximum trailer weight including its cargo weight your vehicle can tow E150104AUN Cargo capacity The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load if your vehicle is equipped with a trail er E150105AUN Steps for determining correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The com bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug gage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg 150 los passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg 650 Ibs 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg or 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs ee 5
158. arking brake may freeze apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P Park and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll Then release the parking brake Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal This can cause the transmission to overheat Always use the brake pedal or parking brake Driving your vehicle CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED x NOTICE During normal cruise control operation when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds The delay is normal OHM059049 1 CRUISE indicator 2 SET indicator E090000AHM EU The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a con stant speed without pressing the acceler ator pedal This system is designed to function above approximately 40 km h 25 mph Driving your vehicle Type B Move the lever down to SET and release it at the desired speed The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate Release the accel erator at the same time The desired speed will automatically be maintained On a steep grade the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill OHM059043 OHM059046 E090100BHM EU To set cruise control speed 1 Pull or press the CRUISE ON OFF 3 Type A Push the SET switch and release it at switch on the steering wheel to turn the sys
159. as described in section 7 The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized KIA dealer or a service station E120400BUN Change to winter weight oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity winter weight oil be used during cold weather See section 8 for recommendations If you aren t sure what weight oil you should use consult an authorized KIA dealer E120500AUN Check spark plugs and ignition system Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 7 and replace them if necessary Also check all ignition wiring and compo nents to be sure they are not cracked worn or damaged in any way E120600AUN To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing squirt an approved de icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening If a lock is covered with ice squirt it with an approved de icing fluid to remove the ice If the lock is frozen internally you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury E120700AUN Use approved window washer anti freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing add an approved window washer anti freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the con tainer Window washer anti freeze is available from an authorized KIA dealer and most auto parts outlets Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti freeze as these may damage the paint finish
160. at an authorized KIA dealer D230400AHM Checking the amount of air con ditioner refrigerant and compres sor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low the performance of the air conditioning is reduced Overfilling also has a negative impact on the air conditioning system Therefore if abnormal operation is found have the system inspected by an authorized KIA dealer x NOTICE It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used Otherwise damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur See ee cee ol Features of your vehicle AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED E Type A Front climate control A C display Front fan speed control switch Driver s temperature control switch AUTO automatic control button Front blower OFF button Air conditioning button Front windshield defroster button Dual temperature control selection button 9 Mode selection button 10 Front windshield deicer button 11 Rear window defroster button 12 Air intake control button or recirculated air position button 13 Rear blower ON OFF button controlled from the front or outside fresh air position button 14 Passenger s temperature control switch 15 Rear fan speed control switch controlled from the front 16 Rear temperature control switch 17 Rear mode selection button 18 Rear blower ON OFF button 19 Rear fan speed
161. ation previously saved to be selected for broadcast 1 After selecting one of the FM1 FM2 AM modes move the select area to one of the six preset buttons stored with the broadcast station desired for listening and press the ENTER key x NOTICE The channels possible for preset are 6 channels each for FM1 FM2 and AM Refer to Chapter Storing a broadcast channel to a preset button for more information on storing presets Selecting station through SEEK This function is used to automatically select channels through the SEEK function 1 After selecting one of the FM1 FM2 AM modes press the SEEK button on the Remote Control to automatical ly search for stations with high recep tion 2 In addition press the SEEK UP DOWN on the remote control to increase or decrease the station automatically to search for high reception stations Selecting a station through TUNE This function allows the TUNE function to be used to directly select the desired broadcast station 1 After selecting one of the FM1 FM2 AM modes press the TUNE button to increase or decrease the station in 1 step increments FM 0 1MHz AM 9kHz Use the TUNE button to select the broadcast station desired for lis tening 2 In addition each time the TUNE UP DOWN button on the remote control is pressed the station will increase or decrease Storing station a preset button Storing Manually 1 To store the current station use the 4
162. bjects which your vehicle hits in the collision The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant lt is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident It is much more likely that you will sim ply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision In order to help provide protection in a severe collision the air bags must inflate rapidly The speed of the air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of the air bag design However air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also caus es the air bags to expand with a great deal of force There are even circumstances under which contact with the steer ing wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel Safety features of your vehicle C040902AHM Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside
163. ble Artist Title If this message is displayed the anten na or antenna cable is broken or unplugged Please consult with your KIA dealership 2 Acquiring Signal If this message is displayed it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal is not available Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky Features of your vehicle RADIO SET UP VOLUME CONTROL WITH BLUETOOTH E Type A 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume 9 a Control Knob 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button AUX USB 4 SCAN Selection Button 7 5 Preset Selection Button 6 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob E rw 7 MUTE Button PA910HMU CDP SS eee ayaa Features of your vehicle E lype B Bluetooth SGibisc gt 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume Control Knob cD AUX USB8 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button 4 SCAN Selection Button w AUOIO CONTROL ENTE 7 7 1 pisc 2 ROM 3 sc 4 DISC 5 er 4 w f 5 Preset Selection Button 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob PA960HMU CDC Features of your vehicle E Type C 1 FM AM Selection Button 2 Power ON OFF Button and Volume Control Knob a Gone 3 Automatic Channel Selection Button LOAD 4 SCAN Selection Button O CDVAUX 5 Preset Selection Button 6 TUNE AUDIO Knob O 2 FOLDER PA965HMU CDC_RSE Features of your vehicle How to
164. button The track can be fast forwarded 3 FAST REWIND button The track can be rewinded 4 TRACK DOWN button The start of the current or previous track will begin playing The start of the current track will begin playing if the track has played for over 3 seconds The start of the previous track will begin playing if the track has played for under 3 seconds 5 TRACK UP button The start of the next track will begin play Ing 6 Play time The play time of the currently playing song Is displayed 7 DISC number display The DISC number of the currently play ing disc is displayed 8 TRACK display The current TRACK of the currently play ing DISC is displayed 9 RDM RPT SCAN display This is displayed when the RANDOM REPEAT SCAN functions are operating 10 DISC button The 6 disc CD changer select screen is displayed NOTICE There is a PLAY PAUSE function with in DVDP CD mode Selecting a DISC track 1 Select the Track button on the CD operation screen The track will change each time the TRACK buttons are pressed Fast forwarding a track 1 Press the FAST FORWARD button to fast forward the current song x NOTICE The tracks will continue to be searched if the button is continuously pressed If released the video will return to normal speed a ee ei Saal Features of your vehicle MP3 mode Starting MP3 mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to d
165. c Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current file Press again within 1 second to return the previous file Press and hold TRACK to initiate rewind search Press SEEK for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance to the next file Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 3 REPEAT Play Button A single song is played repeatedly 4 iPod Selection Button If iPod is connected it turns to iPod mode 5 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the file cur rently played as below when the button is pressed each time TitleArtist Album m Searching for a desired Song Title Using search mode s individual hierar chy you can narrow down your search as shown in the table below For example Searching by Composers e Press FOLDER A or turn ENTER to activate the Menu Select mode e Turn ENTER to select the Compo sers and press ENTER e Turn ENTER to select the Albums and press ENTER e Turn ENTER to select the Song and press ENTER The selected song is played In the search mode pressing FOLDER A will return to the previ ous mode Other search modes scan be adjusted as above Although the hierarchy dif fers Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Hierarchy 5 Playlist Playlists Songs Artist Artists Albums Songs Album Albums Songs Song Songs Genre Genres Artists Albums Songs Composer Composers Alb
166. cator light blinks ESC OFF state e When the ignition is turned e When the Electronic Stability e To cancel ESC operation ON ESC and ESC OFF indi Control is operating properly ESC press the ESC OFF button cator lights illuminate for you can feel a slight pulsation OFF ESC OFF indicator light illu approximately 3 seconds in the vehicle This is only the minates then ESC is turned on effect of brake control and e If the ignition switch is turned e Press the ESC OFF button indicates nothing unusual to LOCK position when ESC for at least half a second after e When moving out of the mud is off ESC remains off Upon turning the ignition ON to turn or slippery road pressing the restarting the engine the ESC off ESC OFF indicator accelerator pedal may not ESC will automatically turn will illuminate To turn the cause the engine rom revo on again ESC on press the ESC OFF lutions per minute to button ESC OFF indicator increase light will go off e When starting the engine you may hear a slight ticking sound This is the ESC per forming an automatic system self check and does not indi cate a problem See ee See Driving your vehicle E ESC indicator light blinks ESC E ESC OFF indicator light comes on ESC OFF E070503AEN EU Indicator light When the ignition switch is turned ON the indicator light illuminates then goes off if ESC system is operating normally The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ES
167. ce problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty G270302AUN Engine exhaust gas precautions carbon monoxide e Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes Therefore if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle have it inspected and repaired immediately If you ever sus pect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle drive it only with all the windows fully open Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately Maintenance r TC e Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas Such as garages any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area e When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running adjust the ventilation system as needed to draw outside air into the vehicle e Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi cle for any extended time with the engine running e When the engine stalls or fails to start excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system G270303BUN Operating precautions for catalytic converters if equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device Therefore the following precautions must be observed e Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso line engines e Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction such as misfire or a noticeable loss of per formance
168. ce the ele ment more often than the usual recom mended intervals CAUTION e Do not drive with the air cleaner removed this will result in exces sive engine wear When removing the air cleaner fil ter be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake or damage may result Use a KIA genuine part Use of non genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER G170100AHM EC Filter inspection If the vehicle is operated in severely air polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier When you replace the climate control air filter replace it performing the following procedure and be careful to avoid dam aging other components Maintenance WIPER BLADES 1JBA5122 G180100AUN Blade inspection NOTICE Commercial hot waxes applied by auto matic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the wind shield wipers Common sources of con tamination are insects tree sap and hot wax treatments used by some commer cial car washes If the blades are not wip ing properly clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent and rinse thoroughly with clean water J CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades do not use gasoline kerosene
169. cle s audio Devices such as MP3 Player Cellular phone Digital camera those are not recognizable by standard USB I F IMPLE MENTERS FORUM can be unrec ognizable USB devices other than standard ized goods METAL COVER TYPE USB can be unrecognizable USB flash memory reader such as CF SD microSD etc or exter nal HDD type devices can be unrecognizable Continued Continued Music files protected by DRM DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE MENT are not recognizalbe The data in the USB memory may get lost while using this AUDIO It is recommeded to back up impor tant data Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack Please make sure only to use plug type connector products as shown below lt gt Features of your vehicle USB MEMORY AUX iPod E Type A 1 RANDOM Play Button 2 Automatic Track Selection Button 3 REPEAT Play Button co 4 SCROLL Play Button AUX USB 5 5 USB AUX iPod Selection Button E o e 6 INFORMATION Button i 7 File Search Knob and ENTER Button ZE 8 FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button 9 SCAN Selection Button A 200HMU iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc Features of your vehicle E Type B h RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button SCROLL Play Button USB AUX iPod Selection Button INFORMATION
170. closing automati cally it will reverse the direction and then stop The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it See ce cece Features of your vehicle OHM048028 D110200AHM D110300AEN Tilting the sunroof N CAUTION Sunshade To open the sunroof autotilt feature e Periodically remove any dirt that The sunshade will automatically open push the sunroof control lever upward to may accumulate on the guide rail with the glass panel when the glass the second detent The sunroof will tilt all e If you try to open the sunroof panel moves Close it manually if you the way open To stop the sunroof tilting when the temperature is below _ want it closed at any point operate the control lever freezing or when the sunroof is To close the sunroof pull the sunroof covered with snow or ice the lever downward until the sunroof moves glass or the motor could be dam to the desired position aged The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is opened Features of your vehicle D110500AHM EE Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is discon nected or discharged you must reset your sunroof system as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 According to the position of the s
171. cloth with very warm 2 This device must accept any interfer damage during an automatic car wash or AS ence received including interference When passing through a narrow street that may cause undesired operation d P A CAUTION If the mirror is jammed with ice do not adjust the mirror by force Use an approved spray de icer not radi ator antifreeze to release the frozen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt NVS is a registered trademark and Z Nav is a trademark of the Gentex Corporation Zeeland Michigan HomeLink is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls Incorporated Milwaukee Wisconsin Features of your vehicle i a OHM048040N D140201AHM EE Remote control The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors To adjust the position of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC posi tion Push the switch 1 to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to posi tion the selected mirror up down left or right After the adjustment put the switch into the neutral center position to prevent inadvertent adjustment CAUTION The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjust ing angles but the motor contin ues to operate while the switch is pressed Do not press the sw
172. control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the DISC key on the Rear Remote Control will display the most recently operated mode between CDC mode and DVDP mode In addition pressing the DISC key will change the mode in CDC DVDP CDC order 2 When in CDC mode use the 4 direc tion joystick on the REAR panel to move to the select area of the DISC where the CD has been inserted and press the select button on the remote control to begin playing NOTICE If there are no discs already inserted in the CD Changer or the DVD player pressing the DISC key on the remote control will not begin mode operation Selecting a track with the Remote Control amp Searching a playing track 1 Press the SEEK TRACK UP DOWN key on the Remote Control to move to the previous or next track 2 Pressing the TUNE UP DOWN key on the Remote Control will quick search the current track NOTICE In the case of CD Changer The RAN DOM REPEAT and SCAN functions are supported only by the FRONT sys tem There are no buttons for these functions in the REAR system and the method of operating the FRONT sys tem is the same as the REAR system In the case of DVD Player The RAN DOM REPEAT and SCAN functions are not supported in both FRONT and REAR systems Features of your vehicle CD mode menu screen configuration CDC cp 1 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is CD Changer mode 2 FAST FORWARD
173. control sys tem press the rear blower ON OFF button located on the front and rear cli mate control panel once more indica tor light is not illuminated wi e If you operate the rear temperature or mode on the rear climate control panel the corresponding rear temperature or mode will operate independently regardless of the front climate control system operation e If the ignition switch is turned OFF and ON again the rear temperature and mode will be controlled automatically by the front climate control system To activate the rear air conditioning press the A C button on the front cli mate control system Features of your vehicle e Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling e oy Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling and the lower vents e Rear air blows from the lower vents E 2nd row OHM048113 D240301AHM Rear mode selection The rear mode is selected by pressing the rear mode selection button on the rear control panel as follows OHM048210 OHM048115 Features of your vehicle OHM048116 Rear vents The vent can be adjusted by rotating the blade NOTICE If all the vents are closed it may cause some noise Always have more than 2 vents opened OHM048117 D240302AHM Rear temperature control To change the air temperature in the rear passenger compartment pull up A the switch for warm and hot air H or push down
174. crossroad or crossing set the shift lever in the N Neutral position and then push the vehi cle to a safe place F020200AHM If you have a flat tire while driving If a tire goes flat while you are driving 1 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so brake carefully and pull off the road Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground If you are on a divided highway do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes What to do in an emergency 2 When the vehicle is stopped turn on your emergency hazard flashers set the parking brake and put the trans mission in P Park 3 Have all passengers get out of the vehicle Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic 4 When changing a flat tire follow the instruction provided later in this sec tion FO20300AUN If engine stalls while driving 1 Reduce your speed gradually keeping a straight line Move cautiously off the road to a safe place 2 Turn on your emergency flashers 3 Try to start the engine again If your vehicle will not start contact an authorized KIA dealer or seek other qualified assistance IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START F030100AHM If engine doesn t t
175. ctive call is displayed When the call is finished press the end switch x NOTICE In the following situations your voice may not reach the other party 1 Talk alternately with the other party on the phone If you talk at the same time the voice may not reach each other parties This is not a malfunc tion It is not a malfunction 2 Keep the volume of receiving voice to a low level Otherwise high volumes may result in an echo When you talk on the phone speak clearly towards the microphone 3 When driving on a rough road 4 When driving at high speeds 5 When the window is open 6 When the air conditioning vents are facing the microphone 7 When the sound of the air condition ing fan is loud Features of your vehicle m Key matrix No KEY i Connected u Tae Disconnected COmnected Incoming Call Outgoing Call Active Call 2nd Call Empty BT SETUP menu 2nd call 2nd Call SHORT Not Paired Not Connecting Accept Call 1st Call waiting 2nd Call waiting 2nd Call active 1st Call active RO NIE Transfer call secret call VR VR VR VR MODE Cancel MODE Cancel MODE Cancel MODE Cancel Speaker Speaker Adaptation Adaptation Only English Only English SHORT Active Active Active Active 2 Reject Call End Call End Call End Call Change Change Change Change language language language language Features of your vehicle REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTE
176. d 180 km h 112 mph 190 km h 118 mph 210 km h 130 mph 240 km h 149 mph Above 240 km h 149 mph G201003AHM 3 Checking tire life TIN Tire Identification Number Any tires that are over 6 years old based on the manufacturing date including the spare tire should be replaced by new ones You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall possibly on the inside of the wheel displaying the DOT Code The DOT Code is a series of num bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters The manufactur ing date is designated by the last four digits characters of the DOT code DOT XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number tire size and tread pattern and the last four num bers indicate week and year manu factured For example DOT XXXX XXXX 1609 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2009 Maintenance O_O eee G201004AEN 4 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rub ber coated fabric in the tire Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire which include steel nylon polyester and others The letter R means radial ply con struction the letter D means diago nal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply con struction G201005AUN 5 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire Do
177. d 3 Unoccupied Deactivated 4 Malfunction in the system 7 Activated 1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat the system may recognize him her as a child depending on his her physique and posture 2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger seat the system may recognize him her as an infant depending on his her physique or posture 3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle Proper position B990A010 When an adult is seated in the front pas senger seat if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is on turn the igni tion switch to the LOCK position and ask the passenger to sit properly sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFP indi cator is still on ask the passenger to move to the rear seat x NOTICE The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 sec onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON positio
178. d corrosion are road salts dust control chemicals ocean air and industrial pollution Moisture breeds corrosion Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur For example corrosion is accelerated by high humidity particularly when tempera tures are just above freezing In such conditions the corrosive material is kept in contact with the vehicle s surface by moisture that evaporate slowly Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in con tact with the vehicle Although the mud appears to be dry it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dis persed For all these reasons it is par ticularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle Maintenance r TC To help prevent corrosion You can help prevent corrosion from get ting started by observing the following Keep your vehicle clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of cor rosive materials Attention to the under side of the vehicle is particularly impor tant e If you live in a high corrosion area where road salts are used near the ocean areas with industrial pollution acid rain etc
179. d excessive swelling indi cate deterioration Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources such as the exhaust manifold Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat dam age or mechanical wear Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou plings to make sure they are secure and that no leaks are present Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage See eee ae Maintenance ee GO50800AUN Air cleaner filter A Genuine KIA air cleaner filter is recom mended when the filter is replaced GO50900AUN Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range G051000AHM Valve clearance 3 8L Inspect for excessive valve noise and or engine vibration and adjust if necessary An authorized KIA dealer should perform the operation G051100AHM Cooling system Check the cooling system components such as the radiator coolant reservoir hoses and connections for leakage and damage Replace any damaged parts G051200AUN Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule G051500AUN Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation chafing cracks deterioration and any leakage Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately
180. d the LATCH child restraint assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors TE Safety features of your vehicle AIR BAG ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM C040000AHM Driver s front air bag Driver s knee air bag Passenger s front air bag Side impact air bag Curtain air bag if equipped 1 2 3 4 5 The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OHM039101N Safety features of your vehicle C040900AHM EU How does the air bag system operate Air bags are activated able to inflate if necessary only when the ignition Switch is turned to the ON or START position Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a serious frontal collision or side colli sion if equipped with a side air bag or curtain air bag in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury Also the side and or curtain air bags inflate instantly in the event of a rollover in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate Generally air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a col lision and its direction These two fac tors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment inflation signal Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed angles of impact and the densi ty and stiffness of the vehicles or o
181. desired mode Each press changes the mode as below Hierarchy 4 AUTO VOLUME CON TROL mode is only selected in the CDP e Hierarchy 1 e Hierarchy 2 Features of your vehicle For example To Adjusting SIRIUS DISPLAY e Press AUDIO to activate SETUP mode then Hierarchy 1 is selected Rotate AUDIO to select the SAT con trol mode Rotate AUDIO to select the SIRIUS Display mode e If AUDIO is not pressed rotated for 5 seconds after adjusting the display automatically returns to normal mode Another adjusting mode can be used for same operation 7 MUTE Button CDP ONLY Press MUTE to stop the sound and MUTE is displayed on the LCD Features of your vehicle CDP WITH BLUETOOTH _s CD Loading SLOT 2 CD Eject Button 3 RANDOM Play Button Aree Oan 4 Automatic Track Selection Button 5 REPEAT Play Button E 6 CD Indicator ere 7 CD Selection Button Ea s 8 SCAN Play Button 9 Track File Search Knob and ENTER y Button 10 Folder search Button 11 INFORMATION Button PA960HMU CDC Features of your vehicle CD CHANGER WITH BLUETOOTH E Type A CD Loading Slot CD Eject Button RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button CD Indicator CD Selection Button SCAN Play Button Track File Search Knob and ENTER Button 10 Folder search Button 11 INFORMATION Button il a 12 DISC UP DOW
182. dly 4 When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly release both buttons 5 Press and hold the _ just trained HomeLink button and observe the red Status Indicator LED If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your new device should activate Erasing HomeLink buttons Individual buttons cannot be erased However to erase all three programmed buttons 1 Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds 2 Release both buttons Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System is now in the training learn mode and can be programmed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming sections above See E Features of your vehicle FCC ID NZLZTVHL3 D140200AHM EU IC 4112A ZTVHL3 Outside rearview mirror A CAUTION Be sure to adjust the mirror angles Do not scrape ice off the mirror This device complies with Industry before driving face this may damage the surface Canada Standard RSS 210 Your vehicle is equipped with both left A the glass If ice should restrict Operation is subject to the following two hand and right hand outside rearview h e Pre Tda eae do ae conditions mirrors The mirrors can be adjusted ans jae i eas R 1 this device may not cause harmful remotely with the remote switch The mir d i interference a ror heads can be folded back to prevent PA or soft
183. dows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy e Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds To help offset some of this loss slow down when driving in these conditions Keeping a vehicle in good operating con dition is important both for economy and safety Therefore have an authorized KIA dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance Driving your vehicle SS 1VQA3002 E110100AHM EC Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water snow Ice mud sand or similar hazards follow these suggestions e Drive cautiously and allow extra dis tance for braking e Avoid sudden braking or steering SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS e When braking with non ABS brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up and down motion until the vehicle is stopped If stalled in snow mud or sand use second gear Accelerate slowly to avoid spinning the drive wheels e Use sand rock salt or other non slip material under the drive wheels to pro vide traction when stalled in ice snow or mud E110200BHM EU Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow sand or mud first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your driving wheels Then shift back and forth between R Reverse and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission Do not race the engine and spin the wheels as little
184. ds Features of your vehicle REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Sensors OHM048060N D170000AEN EU The rear parking assist system assists the driver during backward movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed within a distance of 120 cm 47 in behind the vehicle This system is a supplemental system and it is not intend ed to nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver The sensing range and objects detectable by the back sensors are limit ed Whenever backing up pay aS much attention to what is behind you as you would in a vehicle without a rear parking assist system OHM048229N D0170500AHM Rear parking assist system OFF button if equipped To turn off the rear parking assist system push the button the indicator light will illuminate Features of your vehicle Operation of the rear parking assist system D170101AEN EU Operating condition e This system will activate when backing up with the ignition switch ON If the vehicle is moving at a speed over 5 km h 3 mph the system may not be activated correctly e The sensing distance while the rear parking assist system is in operation is approximately 120 cm 47 in e When more than two objects are sensed at the same time the closest one will be recognized first D170102AUN EU Types of warning sound e When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm 47 in to 32 in from the rear bumper Buzzer
185. ds sometimes called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 2 32 inch of tread remains UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction tempera ture and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce dures The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Vehicle Capacity Weight The num ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg 150 Ibs plus the rated cargo and luggage load Maintenance O_O Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight accessory weight and normal occu pant weight and driving by 2 Vehicle Placard A label permanent ly attached to a vehicle showing the Original equipment tire size and rec ommended inflation pressure All season tires KIA specifies all season tires on some models to provide good per formance for use all year round including snowy and icy road condi tions All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and or M S Mud and Snow on the tire sidewall Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas Summer tires KIA specifies summer ti
186. e OFF button press the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more The display will change from Fahrenheit to Centigrade or from Centigrade to Fahrenheit If the battery has been discharged or dis connected the temperature mode dis play will reset to Centigrade D240203AEN Air intake control This is used to select the outside fresh air position or recirculated air position To change the air intake control position push the control button Features of your vehicle Recirculated air position NOTICE 3 With the recirculated air Prolonged operation of the heater in the position selected air from recirculated air position without air the passenger compart conditioning selected may cause fog ment will be drawn through ging of the windshield and side windows the heating system and and the air within the passenger com heated or cooled according partment may become stale to the function selected In addition prolonged use of the air con ditioning with the recirculated air posi Outside fresh air position tion selected will result in excessively dry With the outside fresh air air in the passenger compartment position selected air enters the vehicle from out side and is heated or cooled according to the function selected Features of your vehicle OHM048109 D240205AHM Fan speed control The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by operating the fan speed control switch To change the fan speed
187. e alignment may need to be reset If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your wheels may need to be rebalanced S2BLA790A Directional tires if equipped lt lt gt Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle s alu CBGQ0707A minum wheels Use only approved wheel weights CAUTION Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated Maintenance ih 1 b Tread wear indicator OEN076053 G200600AHM EU Tire replacement If the tire is worn evenly a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread This shows there is less than 1 6 mm 1 16 inch of tread left on the tire Replace the tire when this happens Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac ing the tire Maintenance ee O G200601AUN Compact spare tire replacement if equipped A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount ing a regular size tire G200700BHM EC Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for
188. e ignition switch turns OFF and ON played in 1 C 1 F increments The tem again the temperature mode will be dis perature range is between 40 C 60 C played 40 F 140 F OHM048139 Features of your vehicle CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compart ment OHM048155 D281000AHM Luggage net holder if equipped To keep items from shifting in the cargo area you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net If necessary contact your authorized KIA dealer to obtain a luggage net Features of your vehicle EXTERIOR FEATURES x NOTICE The crossbars if equipped should be placed in the proper load carrying positions prior to placing items onto the roof rack If the vehicle is equipped with a sun roof be sure not to position cargo onto the roof rack in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation e When the roof rack is not being used to carry cargo the crossbars may need to be repositioned if wind noise is detected D290100AHM Roof rack if equipped CAUTION If the vehicle has a roof rack you can e When carrying cargo on the roof load cargo on top of your vehicle rack take the necessary precau The two crossbars on the roof rack can tions to make sure the cargo does be repositioned forward or rearward for not damage the roof of the vehicle conven
189. e plate can easily be seen through on the driver s or front passenger s side the windshield from outside center pillar gives the vehicle identifica tion number VIN OHM088001 H010000AHM The vehicle identification number VIN is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership etc Specifications amp Consumer information TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER PRESSURE LABEL a W p S OHM088005N HO30000AUN The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best perform ance for normal driving The tire label located on the driver s side center pillar gives the tire pressures rec ommended for your car lt OHM089007 HO4000AUN The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing See ee ce aed Index A Air bag advanced supplemental restraint system 3 40 Air cleaner ais dso eyeraseiai e avaraue aiave o a ejaja alae esa aveis T E a E T ave ai aso e ece ie s ayarate e a1siafere 7 21 Appearance CAfCeeereeeeeeeceeecoecooceoeeecoccooeeocseococsocecoeecooesoceeoe 7 53 Audio system Cee Te re ee CO TAT 4 124 Automatic climate control system A E T 4 98 Automatic transmission EERO EO OO Oc ECEAT 5 12 B Battery TT E T ET RRO eT N TE ei 7 25 Before driving aaa E E E E E E a E severe 5 3 Pea Fi I T A T T A AT 7 18 Brake system E E E E T E TE TE 5 27 Bulb wattage a E T E A T A S T T
190. e see the warranty infor mation contained in the Warranty amp Maintenance booklet in your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with an emis sion control system to meet all applicable emission regulations There are three emission control sys tems as follows 1 Crankcase emission control system 2 Evaporative emission control system 3 Exhaust emission control system In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems it is rec ommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an author ized KIA dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test With Electronic Stability Control ESC system e To prevent the vehicle from misfir ing during dynamometer testing turn the Electronic Stability Control ESC system off by pressing the ESC switch e After dynamometer testing is com pleted turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again G270100AUN 1 Crankcase emission control system The positive crankcase ventilation sys tem is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow by gases being emitted from the crankcase This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose Inside the crankcase the fresh air mixes with blow by gases which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system G270200AUN 2 Evaporative emission control including ORVR Onboard Refue
191. e vehicle is being driven in severe conditions more frequent oil and filter changes are required G050200AUN Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts cracks excessive wear or oil satu ration and replace if necessary Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as neces sary G050300AUN Fuel filter cartridge A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven damage the emission system and cause multiple issues such as hard starting If an exces sive amount of foreign matter accumu lates in the fuel tank the filter may require replacement more frequently After installing a new filter run the engine for several minutes and check for leaks at the connections Fuel filters should be installed by an authorized KIA dealer G050400AUN EU Fuel lines fuel hoses and con nections Check the fuel lines fuel hoses and con nections for leakage and damage Have an authorized KIA dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately GO50600AUN Vapor hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced G050700AUN Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and or mechanical damage Hard and brittle rubber cracking tears cuts abrasions an
192. e will increase to the maximum HI by pulling up A the switch The temperature will decrease to the min imum Lo by pushing down V the switch When operating the switch the tempera ture will increase or decrease by 0 5 C 1 F When set to the lowest tem perature setting the air conditioning will operate continuously Features of your vehicle OHM048107 Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually 1 Press the DUAL button to operate the driver and passenger side temperature individually Also if the passenger side temperature control switch PASS is operated it will automatically change to the DUAL mode as well 2 Operate the left temperature control to adjust the driver side temperature Operate the right temperature control to adjust the passenger side tempera ture When the driver side temperature is set to the highest HI or lowest Lo temper ature setting the DUAL mode is deacti vated for maximum heating or cooling Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally 1 Press the DUAL button again to deac tivate DUAL mode The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side 2 Operate the driver side temperature control switch The driver and passen ger side temperature will be adjusted equally Temperature conversion You can switch the temperature mode between Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol lows While pressing th
193. e will not be recog nized The USB device should only be formatted to FAT 12 16 32 USB device without USB I F IMPLEMENTERS FORUM authentication may not be recog nizable Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in con tact with human body or any object If you repeat connecting or dis connecting USB device in a short period of time it may break the device You might hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnect ing USB device Continued USB device during playback in USB mode the external USB device can be damaged or mal function Therefore connect the external USB device when the engine is turned off or in another mode Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of files stored in the device there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device so you may have to wait Do not use the USB device for other purposes than playing music files Use of USB accessories such as recharger or heater using USB I F IMPLEMENTERS FORUM may lower the performance or cause trouble Continued Features of your vehicle Continued If you use devices such as a USB hub you purchased separately the vehicle s audio system may not recognize the USB device Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle If the USB device is divided by logical drives only the music files on the highest priority drive are recognized by the vehi
194. e wiper switch position In this case have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible e When the ignition key is removed the wiper blade may sometimes slightly move to reduce the deterioration of the windshield wipers D200200ASA Windshield washers In the OFF position pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1 3 cycles Use this function when the windshield is dirty The spray and wiper operation will con tinue until you release the lever If the washer does not work check the washer fluid level If the fluid level is not sufficient you will need to add appropri ate non abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side Features of your vehicle J CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the washer pump do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry To prevent damage to the wiper blades do not use gasoline kerosene paint thinner or other solvents on or near them To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components do not attempt to move the wipers manually D200300AHM Rear window wiper and washer switch if equipped The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at t
195. earch Button eo jp 12 INFORMATION Button 13 DISC UP DOWN Button 14 CD Loading Button a CD Number Indicator field b CD Slot indicator O A 300HMU Features of your vehicle E Type B CD Loading Slot CD Eject Button RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button SCROLL Play Button CD Indicator CD Selection Button SCAN Play Button 0 Track File Search Knob and ENTER Button 11 FOLDER Search Button ere at 12 INFORMATION Button 13 DISC UP DOWN Button 14 CD Loading Button a CD Number Indicator field b CD Slot indicator Guse LOAD gt CD AUX S O ON OOF WN gt OOG O A 350HMU a ent yl Features of your vehicle How to Activate CDP CD CHANGER 1 CD Loading Slot e Please place the CD with the printed side upward and then gently push in e CDP models support both 8cm and 12 cm CDs e CDC models support only 12 cm CD e If VCD Data CD DVD are loaded MEDIA ERROR message will appear and the CD will eject CAUTION Don t insert a CD if CD indicator is illuminated in the CDP 2 CD Eject Button e Press this button to eject the CD during CD playback e If there is no CD in the deck NO DISC will be displayed for 5 seconds and returns to the previous mode x ALL EJECT CDC ONLY Press this button for more than 0 8 second to eject all discs inside
196. earch Knob and ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to display the Track NO File name after the current song Turn this button counterclockwise to display the Track NO File Name before the current song To select the displayed song press the button 10 FOLDER Search Button e Folder name File name the first song in the folder is moved up or down from the currently playing folder e To select the displayed folder press ENTER NO 10 button 11 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the current CD TRACK FILE as below when the button is pressed each time e CDDA Disc TitleDisc Artist Track Title Track Artist Total Track not displayed if the information is not available on the DISC e MP3 WMA File Name Title Artist gt Album Folder Name Total File 12 DISC UP DOWN Button CDC ONLY Disc is moved up or down from the cur rently playing disc 13 CD Loading Button CDC ONLY How to load a CD e Press LOAD for less than 0 8 second e An empty slot is selected and the CD number indicator a blinks on the LCD After WAIT is displayed for a moment INSERT DISC 1 6 is diplayed and the CD slot indicator b blinks Insert a CD while the slot indicator blinks How to load CDs ALL Load e Press LOAD for more than 0 8 sec ond e An empty slot is selected and the CD number indicator a blinks on the LCD e After WAIT is displayed for a moment INSERT DISC 1 6 is diplayed
197. eater than 40 km h 25 mph and for more than 25 km 15 mile Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes Before towing check the auto matic transmission fluid leak under your vehicle If the auto matic transmission fluid is leak ing a flatbed equipment or tow ing dolly must be used FO80400AHM Tie down hook for flatbed towing OHM068014 Engine compartment 7 2 Maintenance services 7 4 Owner maintenance 7 5 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items 7 11 Engine oil 7 14 Engine coolant 7 15 Brake fluid 7 18 Power steering fluid 7 19 Washer fluid 7 20 Parking brake 7 20 Air cleaner 7 21 Climate control air filter 7 21 Wiper blades 7 22 Battery 7 25 Tires and wheels 7 28 Fuses 7 42 Appearance care 7 53 Maintenance Emission control system 7 67 Maintenance A aaa aaa ENGINE COMPARTMENT E 3 8L Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse box Negative battery terminal Positive battery terminal Radiator cap 9 Engine oil dipstick CO NO OF WD 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Windshield washer fluid reservoir The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OHM018005N G010000AHM EU Maintenance a O E 4 6L Engine coolant res
198. ed to the recom mended tire inflation pressure in warm weather It does not mean your TPMS is malfunction ing because the decreased tem perature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure What to do in an emergenc FO60200AHM TPMS Tire Pressure TPMS Monitoring System malfunction indicator The TPMS malfunction indicator comes on and stays on when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the system is able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate both the TPMS malfunction and the low tire pressure telltale e g if front left sensor fails the TPMS malfunc tion indicator turns on but if front right rear left or rear right tire is under inflated the low tire pressure telltale may turn on at the same time as the TPMS malfunction indicator Have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem CAUTION The TPMS malfunction indica tor may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around elec tric power supply cables or radio transmitter such as at police stations government and public offices
199. eels There should be no other sen sors in the vehicle including the spare tire since this could cause the system to monitor the wrong sensors What to do in an emergency This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any inter ference received including inter ference that may cause undesired operation What to do in an emergency IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE g7 OHM069002 F070100AEN Jack and tools The jack jack handle wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment Pull up the luggage box cover to reach this equipment 1 Jack handle 2 Jack 3 Wheel lug nut wrench F070101BHM Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only To prevent the jack from rattling while the vehicle is in motion store it properly Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury F070200AHM Removing and storing the spare tire Your spare tire is stored underneath your vehicle directly below the cargo area To remove the spare tire 1 Open the tailgate 2 Find the plastic hex bolt cover and remove the cover What to do in an emergency J i P g et ees et ee y OHM068004N _ i OHMO068005N OHMO068006N 3 Use the wheel lug nut wrench to 4 After the spare tire reaches the
200. een in which the 6 supported modes of FM AM SIRIUS CDC DVDP AUX can be selected Re pressing the button will return to the currently playing mode If there are no operations for 10 sec onds while in mode selection screen the previously operated mode will be restored If the REAR system power is off the monitor will turn on and the mode screen will become displayed This is used to play pause when the device is operating a VCD Audio CD MP3 CD or DVD The 4 direction JOYSTICK is used to move the select area on the screen of the REAR System The JOYSTICK key is used to select the button within the select area Features of your vehicle Rear Remote Control Lom U 44 SEEK TRACK DPI lt lt TUNE gt gt ans DISP Pil MENU AUDIO SUBTITLE A Rear Seat Entertainment System 6 Used to turn the power of the Rear system on off Used to illuminate the remote control when the interior of the vehicle is dark Switches to the RADIO mode FM1 FM2 AM Switches to SIRIUS mode 5 Switches to Auxiliary device USB iPod AUX1 AUX2 mode Switches to the CDC DVDP mode 7 This displays the menu buttons for the 9 mode currently operating on the REAR system Used to return to the previous screen When moving to the parent menu from the child menu menu which is one level lower there will be no oper ation within the main menu screen or other screens
201. egative ter minal of the discharged battery This can cause the discharged bat tery to overheat and crack releas ing battery acid 5 Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2 000 rpm then start the engine of the vehi cle with the discharged battery If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent you should have your vehi cle checked by an authorized KIA dealer F040200AHM EU Push starting Vehicles equipped with automatic trans mission cannot be push started Follow the directions in this section for jump starting Se ae eee etal What to do in an emergency IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS FO50000AHM If your temperature gauge indicates over heating you experience a loss of power or hear loud pinging or knocking the engine will probably be too hot If this happens you should 1 2 Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so Place the shift lever in P Park and set the parking brake If the air conditioning is on turn it off If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from underneath the hood stop the engine Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating If the fan is not run ning turn the engine off 4 O1 Check
202. ehicle E070500AHM EU Electronic stability control ESC The Electronic Stability Control ESC system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes in the engine management system to stabilize the vehicle The Electronic Stability Control ESC system is an electronic system designed to help the driver maintain vehicle control under adverse conditions It is not a substitute for safe driving practices Factors including speed road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety When you apply your brakes under con ditions which may lock the wheels you may hear a tik tik sound from the brakes or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal This is normal and it means your ESC is active x NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start ed These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is functioning properly Driving your vehicle E070501AUN EU When operating E070502AUN EU ESC operation When the ESC is in operation ESC operation off ESC ON condition ESC indi
203. el 3 button Rear light sensor Dimming ON OFF button Features of your vehicle Automatic Dimming Night Vision Safety NVS Mirror The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is the most advanced way to reduce annoying glare in the rearview mirror during any driving situation For more information regarding NVS mirrors and other appli cations please refer to the Gentex web site www gentex com A CAUTION The NVS Mirror automatically reduces glare during driving condi tions based upon light levels moni tored in front of the vehicle and from the rear of the vehicle These light sensors are visible through openings in the front and rear of the mirror case Any object that would obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature Automatic dimming function Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles travel ing behind you The auto dimming func tion can be controlled by the Dimming ON OFF Button 1 Pressing the button turns the auto dimming function OFF which is indicat ed by the green Status Indicator LED turning off 2 Pressing the button again turns the auto dimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator LED turning on x NOTICE The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started Z Nav Compass Display The NVS Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z Nav Compass that sh
204. em inspec tion Maintenance G070200AHM Changing the coolant Have coolant changed by an authorized KIA dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section CAUTION Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such OHMO078004N as the alternator Maintenance BRAKE FLUID If the level is low add fluid to the MAX level The level will fall with accumulated mileage This is a normal condition asso ciated with the wear of the brake linings If the fluid level is excessively low have the brake system checked by an author ized KIA dealer Use only the specified brake fluid Refer to Recommended lubricants and capac ities in section 8 Tag OHM078005N G080100AHM CAUTION Never mix different types of fluid Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle s body paint as paint damage will result Brake fluid which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never reae emona ih d be used as its quality cannot be ee ee guaranteed It should be disposed adding brake fluid clean the area around of properly Don t put in the wrong the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent kind of fluid A few drops of miner Plaka UA COMAINN al based oil such as engine oil in your brake system can damage brake system parts Checking the brake fluid level Check the f
205. ence of cuts cracks excessive wear oiliness and proper ten sion Replace or adjust it if necessary G052400AUN Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts boots and clamps for cracks deterioration or damage Replace any damaged parts and if nec essary repack the grease G052500AUN Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and con nections for leakage and damage Maintenance ENGINE OIL G060100AHM EU Checking the engine oil level 1 Be sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature 3 Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes about 5 minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan 4 Pull the dipstick out wipe it clean and re insert it fully 5 Pull the dipstick out again and check the level The level should be between F and L CAUTION Do not overfill with engine oil It may damage the engine If it is near or at L add enough oil to bring the level to F Do not overfill Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components Use only the specified engine oil Refer to Recommended lubricants and capaci ties in section 8 Maintenance r TSC ENGINE COOLANT G060200AHM G070000AHM Changing the engine oil and filter The high pressure cooling system has a Have engine oil and filter changed by an reservoir filled with year round antifreeze authorized KI
206. erage fuel consumption AVG Instant fuel consumption Instant y ECO ON OFF mode if equipped E Type A E Type A E Type B OHM048050 Odometer The odometer indicates the total dis tance the vehicle has been driven You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed E lype B OHM048051 Tripmeter TRIP A Triometer A TRIP B Triometer B This mode indicates the distance of indi vidual trips selected since the last trip meter reset The meter s working range is from 0 0 to 999 9 km 0 0 to 999 9 miles Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the tripmeter TRIP A or TRIP B is being displayed clears the tripmeter to zero 0 0 Features of your vehicle E Type A E Type A E Type A E lype B OHM048054C Distance to empty if equipped This mode indicates the estimated dis tance to empty based on the current fuel in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel delivered to the engine When the remaining distance is below 30 km 50 miles will be displayed and the dis tance to empty indicator will blink The meter s working range is from 30 to 990 km 50 to 990 miles E Type B OHM048057C Average speed if equipped This mode calculates the average speed of the vehicle since the last average speed reset Even if the vehicle is not in motion the average speed keeps going while the engi
207. erious malfunc tion If this happens stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so turn off the engine and check the oil level If the oil level is low fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again If the light stays on with the engine running turn the engine off immediately In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running the engine should be checked by an authorized KIA dealer before the vehicle is driven again Features of your vehicle D150308AHM EE Parking brake amp brake QG fluid warning light BRAKE Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position The warning light should go off after a few seconds when the parking brake is released Low brake fluid level warning If the warning light remains on it may indicate that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low If the warning light remains on 1 Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle 2 With the engine stopped check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required Then check all brake components for fluid leaks 3 Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are found the warning light remains on or the brakes do not operate properly Have the vehicle towed to any author ized KIA dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs Your vehicle is equipped with dual diago nal b
208. ervoir Engine oil filler cap Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Fuse box Negative battery terminal Positive battery terminal Radiator cap 9 Engine oil dipstick 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 11 Windshield washer fluid reservoir CO NO OF WYP The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OHM018004N See eee eee Maintenance S MAINTENANCE SERVICES G020000AHM You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection proce dures Should you have any doubts concerning the inspection or servicing of your vehi cle we strongly recommend that you have an authorized KIA dealer perform this work An authorized KIA dealer has factory trained technicians and genuine KIA parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service see an authorized KIA dealer Inadequate incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational prob lems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage an accident or person al injury G020100AUN EU Owner s responsibility x NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner s responsibility You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages You need this information
209. es sure as intended TPMS malfunc tions may occur for a variety of rea sons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function proper What to do in an emergenc FO060100AHM l Low tire pressure tell tale When the tire pressure monitoring system warning telltale is illuminat ed one or more of your tires is sig nificantly under inflated Immediately reduce your speed avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle s placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver s side center pillar outer panel If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire Then the TPMS mal function indicator or the Low Tire Pressure telltale may turn on after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle J CAUTION In winter or cold weather the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjust
210. features of your vehicle C020302AKM Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap shoul der belt assemblies whenever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE C020303AUN Injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported When this is necessary you should con sult a physician for recommendations C020304AUN One person per belt Two people including children should never attempt to use a single seat belt This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident C020305AHM Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve max imum effectiveness of the restraint sys tem all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear 2nd and or 3rd row seats should be in an upright posi tion when the vehicle is moving A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear 2nd and or 3rd row seats are in a reclined position Safety features of your vehicle C020400AEN Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be disas sembled or modified In addition care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges doors or other abuse C020401AEN Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected
211. fts on a new vehicle if the battery has been disconnected may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM Transmission Control Module or PCM Powertrain Control Module Depress the brake pedal when shifting c gt The shift lever can be shifted freely OHM058004L EQ60000AUN EU Driving your vehicle For smooth operation depress the brake E060101AHM pedal when shifting from N Neutral to a CAUTION Transmission ranges forward or reverse gear e To avoid damage to your trans The indicator in the instrument cluster mission do not accelerate the displays the shift lever position when the engine in R Reverse or any for ignition switch is in the ON position ward gear position with the brakes on P Park e When stopped on an incline do not hold the vehicle with the engine power Use the service brake or the parking brake e Do not shift from N Neutral or P Park into D Drive or R Reverse when the engine is above idle speed Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the drive wheels from rotating Seca eee dl Driving your vehicle A CAUTION The transmission may be damaged if you shift into P Park while the vehicle is in motion R Reverse Use this position to drive the vehicle backward A CAUTION Always come to a complete
212. g DAAD a 61 0 P 4 rack OS 02 38 pressing the DISC key on the Rear Remote Control will display the most recently operated mode between CDC mode and DVDP mode In addition pressing the DISC key will change the mode in CDC DVDP CDC order Operating the AV MENU by use of Rear Panel 1 Press the AV button on the REAR panel while a VCD is playing to display the semitransparent AV MENU at the top of the screen If the TRACK DOWN UP button is pressed by using the 4 direction joy stick key or the joystick select key on the REAR panel the previous or next track will be played If the FAST FOR WARD REWIND button is pressed by the same method the current track can be rewinded or fast forwarded button on the Remote Control to move to the previous or next track 2 Pressing the TUNE UP DOWN but ton on the Remote Control will quickly search the current track Features of your vehicle VCD mode menu screen configura tion oO am SD jo ecxO5 02 38 1 Mode display This displays that the current mode is VCD mode 2 FAST FORWARD button The track is fast forwarded 3 FAST REWIND button The track is rewinded 4 TRACK DOWN button The start of the current or previous track will begin playing 5 TRACK UP button The start of the next track will begin play Ing 6 PLAY PAUSE button Plays Pauses the track 7 PBC Play Back Control button As a function supported only with Video
213. g light should illuminate for approximately 6 seconds then go off Have the system checked if e The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON e The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds e The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion See eee cee cd Safety features of your vehicle Casares er 1 T m eee l Aa 8 SRCE SIOM5R409 OHM039100N C040100AHM EU SRS components and functions The SRS consists of the following com ponents 1 Driver s front air bag module Passenger s front air bag module Side impact air bag modules Curtain air bag modules Retractor pre tensioner assemblies Air bag warning light SRS control module SRSCM Rollover sensor 8 Front impact sensors 9 Side impact sensors 10 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFP indi cator Front passenger s seat only NOOR OD 11 Occupant detection system Front passenger s seat only 12 Driver s and front passenger s seat belt buckle sensors 13 Drivers knee air bag module if equipped The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre tensioner seat belt deployment The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position after which the SRS air bag warning light sh
214. gh the rearview display mirror while back ing up D330000BHM EE Features of your vehicle LIGHTING D190100AHM Battery saver function The purpose of this feature is to pre vent the battery from being dis charged The system automatically turns off the exterior lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver side door With this feature the parking lights will be turned off automatically if the driver parks on the side of the road at night If necessary to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed per form the following 1 Open the driver side door 2 Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column D190200AHM EU Headlight escort function The headlights and taillights remain on for approximately 5 minutes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position However if the drivers door is opened and closed the headlights and taillights are turned off after 30 seconds The headlights and taillights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the transmitter or turning off the light switch from the headlight or Auto light position D190300AHM Rescue mode function If your vehicle has any problem on the vehicle network system the headlights low beam turn on automatically with the ignition switch in the ON position even though the headlight switch is not turned on At this time the emergency lighting is not
215. ghts Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited Features of your vehicle Product Characteristics This device is a total AV system support ing radio FM1 FM2 AM SIRIUS audio CD MP3 VCD and DVD With a WIDE VGA LCD 176 7 X 99 4mm this device allows for powerful sound and driving enjoyment Display Large size 176 7 X 99 4mm WIDE VGA LCD with CCFL installed large size 176 7 X 99 4 mm WIDE VGA LCD pro vides high viewing pleasure With NORMAL FULL WIDE screens the display can be selected in accor dance to user preference and video suit ability DVD Player Auto Play function Inserting an audio CD MP3 VCD DVD will automatically turn on the device and begin playing Auto conversion to Roof Monitor PBC support PLAY BACK CONTROL The various information encoded in the Video CD can be enjoyed by using the interactive menu encoded in MPEG1 Version 2 0 Video CD discs Others Digital screen control function The brightness saturation color and contrast of the screen can be easily adjusted Features of your vehicle s Name and function of system This switch is used to light up the vehi REAR DVDP DECK parts cle interior in accordance to the open REAR Roof Mount Monitor ing and closing of the door
216. gnition key is left in the ignition switch ACC or LOCK position the key reminder warning chime will sound This is to prevent you from locking your keys in the vehicle The chime sounds until the key is removed from the ignition switch or the driver s door is closed Features of your vehicle D150336AHM 4WD system warning light Fel if equipped If the 4WD system warning light illumi nates this indicates that there is a mal function in the 4WD system If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possi ble D150337AHM EE 4WD LOW indicator if equipped 4WD LOW When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the 4WD LOW indicator will illuminate and then go off in a few sec onds The 4WD LOW indicator illumi nates when the transfer shift knob is set to the 4L Low speed 4 wheel drive posi tion D150337AHM EE 4WD HI indicator ite if equipped When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the 4WD HI indicator will illuminate and then go off in a few sec onds The 4WD HI indicator illuminates when the transfer shift Knob is set to the 4H High speed 4 wheel drive position D150338AHM KEY OUT indicator KEY if equipped OUT When the ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC or ON position if any door is open the system checks for the smart key If the smart key is not in the vehicle the indicator will blink and if all doors are closed the chime will al
217. gt mode e n gt All songs in the current catego ry are played in random e 3 An album in the iPod is selected in random and is played in the order of the songs in the album 2 Automatic Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current file Press again within 1 second to return the previous file Press and hold TRACK to initiate rewind search Press SEEK for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance to the next file Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 3 REPEAT Play Button A single song is played repeatedly 4 SCROLL Play Button File names are scrolled for 5 second on the display 5 iPod Selection Button If iPod is connected it turns to iPod mode 6 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the file cur rently played as below when the button is pressed each time TITLE ARTIST ALBUM m Searching for a desired Song Title Using search mode s individual hierar chy you can narrow down your search as shown in the table below For example Searching by Composers e Press FOLDER A or turn ENTER to activate the Menu Select mode e Turn ENTER to select the Compo sers and press ENTER e Turn ENTER to select the Albums and press ENTER e Turn ENTER to select the Song and press ENTER The selected song is played In the search mode pressing FOLDER A will return to the previ ous mode Other search
218. h every channel starting from the initial chan nel for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the currently selected channel if CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel changing Is done through the channels within cur rent category 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button e Rotate clockwise to increase the chan nel number or to scroll down the cate gory list e Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the channel number or to scroll up the category list e Press this button to make selection of channels or items a ent yal Features of your vehicle 6 CAT FOLDER Button Troubleshooting e Press CAT A or FOLDER V but 1 Antenna Error ton to enter the Category List Mode The display will indicate the category items highlight the category that the current channel belongs to In the Category List Mode press these buttons to navigate category list Press ENTER Button to select the lowest channel in highlighted category If channel is selected by selecting cat egory CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen 7 INFO Selection Button Displays the information of the current channel as below when the button is pressed each time When default display is CAT CH Category Channel Artist Title Composer if available Category Channel When default display is ART TITLE Artist Title Category Channel Composer if availa
219. h the front or rear fan speed switch The rear temperature and mode is controlled automatically by the front climate control system e Rear temperature same as the front temperature e Rear mode control Front mode control is MAX A C 5 Rear mode control is 7 Front mode control is Rear mode control is s Front mode control is ss S3 W Rear mode control iS s yr To turn off the rear climate control sys tem press the rear ON OFF button located on the front and rear climate control panel once more indicator light is not illuminated e If you operate the rear temperature or mode on the rear climate control panel the corresponding rear temperature or mode will operate independently regardless of the front climate control system operation If the ignition switch is turned OFF and ON again the rear temperature and mode will be controlled automatically by the front climate control system e To activate the rear air conditioning press the A C button on the front cli mate control system Features of your vehicle e Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling e oy Rear air blows from the upper vents on the rear ceiling and the lower vents e Rear air blows from the lower vents E 2nd row OHM048113 D230201AHM Rear mode selection The rear mode is selected by pressing the rear mode selection button on the rear control panel as follows wii A OW Phe I aa ete
220. he end of the wiper and washer switch lever Turn the switch to desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer AD Spraying washer fluid and wiping ON Intermittent wiper operation after some normal wiper operation OFF Wiper is not in operation MD Wash with brief wipes See eee eee Features of your vehicle INTERIOR LIGHT D210000AEN J CAUTION Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running It may cause battery discharge OHM048077 D210100AHM Map lamp Push the lens to turn the map lamp on or off This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger OHM048078 D210200AHM EU Room lamp Type A The light will turn on as below if the but ton is pressed The light will turn off if the button is pressed again e DOOR The light comes on when any door or tailgate is opened regardless of the ignition switch position When doors are unlocked by the transmit ter the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed However if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked the light will turn off immediate ly If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position the light stays on for about 20 minutes However if a door is opened
221. he mainte nance schedule in section 7 If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions more frequent maintenance is required see section 7 for details Keep your vehicle clean For maximum service your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials It is especially important that mud dirt ice etc not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion Travel lightly Don t carry unnecessary weight in your vehicle Weight reduces fuel economy Don t let the engine idle longer than necessary If you are waiting and not in traffic turn off your engine and restart only when you re ready to go See eee cee ee Driving your vehicle Remember your vehicle does not require extended warm up After the engine has started allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac ing the vehicle in gear In very cold weather however give your engine a slightly longer warm up period Don t lug or over rev the engine Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking If this happens shift to a lower gear Over revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit This can be avoid ed by shifting at the recommended speed e Use your air conditioning sparingly The air conditioning system is operat ed by engine power so your fuel econ omy is reduced when you use it e Open win
222. he numerical sequence shown in the image until they are all tight Then double check each nut for tightness After changing wheels have an authorized KIA dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible Wheel nut tightening torque 9 11 kg m 65 79 Ib ft If you have a tire gauge remove the valve cap and check the air pressure If the pressure is lower than recom mended drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the cor rect pressure If it is too high adjust it until it is correct Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure If the cap is not replaced dust and dirt may get into the tire valve and air may leak from the tire If you lose a valve cap buy another and install it as soon as possible After you have changed the wheels always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations CAUTION Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled or if replaced that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used Installation of a non metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads Be sure to use extreme care in checking
223. help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns E140402AUN Passing You ll need more passing distance up ahead when youre towing a trailer And because of the increased vehicle length you ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane E140403AUN Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move your hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you E140404AUN Making turns When you re turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer won t strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers Signal well in advance Driving your vehicle E140405AHM EU Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have a different turn signal flasher and extra wiring The green arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly connected the trailer lights will also flash to alert other drivers youre about to turn change lanes or stop When towing a trailer the green arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signals when in fact they are not It s
224. hemical cleaner or polish Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label G230102CUN Finish maintenance Washing To help protect your vehicle s finish from rust and deterioration wash it thoroughly and frequenily at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water If you use your vehicle for off road driv ing you should wash it after each off road trip Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt dirt mud and other foreign materials Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean Insects tar tree sap bird droppings industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle s finish if not removed immediately Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits A mild soap safe for use on painted surfaces may be used After washing rinse the vehicle thor oughly with lukewarm or cold water Do not allow soap to dry on the finish CAUTION Do not use strong soap chemical detergents or hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm Do not wash the side windows too close with high pressure water Water may leak through the windows and wet the interior To prevent damage to the plastic parts do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents Maintenance OJB037800 CAUTION e Water washing in
225. here are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle s magnetic field In these situations the compass will need to be re calibrated to quickly correct for these changes To re calibrate the compass B520CO5NF Features of your vehicle 1 Press and hold the button for more than 6 seconds When the compass memory is cleared a C will appear in the display 2 To calibrate the compass drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 8 km h 5 mph Integrated HomeLink Wireless Control System The HomeLink Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand held radio fre quency RF transmitters with a single built in device This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators garage door openers entry door locks security sys tems even home lighting Both standard and rolling code equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the out lined procedures Additional HomeLink information can be found at www home link com or by calling 1 800 355 3515 CAUTION Before programming HomeLink to a garage door opener or gate oper ator make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage Do not use HomeLink
226. hicle DO080100BHM EE Power windows The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to operate Each door has a power window switch that controls the door s window The driv er has a power window lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK position However if the front doors are opened the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period x NOTICE While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof if equipped in an open or partially open position your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the fol lowing actions If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down partially lower both front windows approximately one inch If you experi ence the noise with the sunroof open slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening OHM048016 D080101AUN Window opening and closing The driver s door has a master power window switch that controls all the win dows in the vehicle To open or close a window press down or pull up the front portion of the corre sponding switch to the first detent posi tion 5 OHM048015L D080102AHM Auto down window if equipped Driver s window Pressing the power window switch mome
227. hicle away from the fuel filler neck nozzle or other gaso line source When using an approved portable fuel container be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire Once refueling has begun contact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is complete Continued Continued Use only approved portable plas tic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline Do not use cellular phones while refueling Electric current and or electronic interference from cel lular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire When refueling always shut the engine off Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire Once refueling is complete check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed before starting the engine DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can when ignited result in fire Continued Features of your vehicle CAUTION e Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the Fuel requirments suggested in sec tion 1 If the fuel filler cap requires replacement use only a genuine KIA cap or the equivalent speci fied for your vehicle An incorrect fuel
228. hicle hold the brakes shift N CAUTION Parking on hills to neutral release the parking brake e When towing a trailer on steep Generally if you have a trailer attached to and slowly release the brakes until the grades in excess of 6 pay your vehicle you should not park your trailer chocks absorb the load close attention to the engine vehicle on a hill People can be seriously 6 Reapply the brakes reapply the park coolant temperature gauge to or fatally injured and both your vehicle ing brake and shift the vehicle to P ensure the engine does not over and the trailer can be damaged if unex Park for automatic transmission heat If the needle of the coolant pectedly roll down the hill 7 Shut off the vehicle and release the temperature gauge moves across vehicle brakes but leave the parking the dial towards H HOT pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so and allow the engine to idle until it cools down You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently You must decide the driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade to reduce However if you ever have to park your the possibility of engine and trailer on a hill here s how to do it transmission overheating 1 Pull the vehicle into the parking space Turn the steering wheel in the direction of the curb right if headed down hill left if headed up hill 2 Shift the vehicle to P Park for an automatic transmission 3 Set the parking brake and
229. hisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner Clean with a mild soap solution recom mended for upholstery or carpets Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected Also its fire resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained CAUTION Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric s appearance and fire resistant properties G230203AUN Cleaning the lap shoulder belt web bing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet Follow the instruc tions provided with the soap Do not bleach or re dye the webbing because this may weaken it G230204AHM Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi cle become fogged that is covered with an oily greasy or waxy film they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner Follow the directions on the glass cleaner con tainer CAUTION Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid Maintenance ETE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM G270000AHM EU The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty Pleas
230. hould auto matically draw back into the retractor If this does not happen check the belt to be sure it is not twisted then try again Safety features of your vehicle E 2nd row seat ayy E 2nd row seat OENO036300 CO020200BHM EU Pre tensioner seat belt Your vehicle is equipped with driver s and front passenger s pre tensioner seat belts The purpose of the pre tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly Mt OHM038030 7 OFIM038032 against the occupant s body in certain C020105AHM e Routing the seat belt webbing through frontal collisions or side collisions or Stowing the rear seat belt the rear seat belt guides will help keep rollovers The pre tensioner seat belts e The rear seat belt buckles can be the belts from being trapped behind or may be activated in crashes where the stowed in the pocket between the rear under the seats frontal collision or side collision or seatback and cushion when not in use rollover is severe enough A CAUTION Take out the rear seat belt from the guides when using the rear seat belt If you pull the seat belt when it is stored in the guides it may dam age the guides and or belt webbing Safety features of your vehicle When the vehicle stops suddenly or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly the seat belt retractor will lock into position In certain frontal collisions or side collisions or rollovers the pre tensioner will activate and pul
231. ic converter damage is possible This could result in loss of engine power Have the Engine Control System inspect ed as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer D150323AUN EU ESC Electronic Stability Control indicator if equipped The ESC indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON but should go off after approximately 3 sec onds When the ESC is on it monitors the driving conditions and under normal driving conditions the ESC light will remain off When a slippery or low trac tion condition is encountered the ESC will operate and the ESC indicator will blink to indicate the ESC is operating ESC D150324AUN EU E ESC OFF indicator Bee if equipped The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON but should go off after approximately 3 seconds To switch to ESC OFF mode press the ESC OFF button The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate indicating the ESC is deactivated If this indicator stays on when ESC OFF is not selected the ESC may have malfunctioned Take your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked See eee eee Features of your vehicle D150343AHM EU DBC Downhill brake control indicator if equipped Type A Type B PA Type A The DBC indicator will illuminate when the DBC button is pressed and the sys tem is on When driving down a steep hill at a speed under 35 km h 22 mph the DBC will operate and the
232. ication Number ESN Electronic Serial Number ready To retrieve the SID ESN turn on the radio press the SAT button and tune to chan nel zero Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on in Sirius mode and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activa tion signal 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button SIRIUS Satellite Radio Press the SAT button to switch to SIR IUS Satellite Radio It cycles through the different bands as noted below SAT 1 SAT2 SAT3 SAT 1 2 Channel Selection Button e Press TRACK V or SEEK AN but ton for less than 0 8 second to select previous or next channel e Press TRACK V or SEEK AN but ton for 0 8 second or longer to continu ously move to previous or next chan nel if CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel up down is done through the channels within cur rent category 3 Preset Selection Button e Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec ond to play the channel saved in each button e Press 1 6 button for 0 8 second or longer to save current channel to the respective button with a beep 4 SCAN Selection Button e When the SCAN button is pressed it automatically scans the radio stations upwards The SCAN feature steps through every channel starting from the initial chan nel for ten seconds Press the SCAN button again to stop the scan feature and to listen to the curren
233. ideo Screen Quality 1 Press the DISP button on the REAR panel or the remote control while non video mode is playing to display the non video mode screen setup menu VIDEO SETTING 2 Use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel or the Remote Control to adjust the brightness day night modes and Auto Light function NOTICE Upon selecting DAY LIGHT the bright screen is always maintained regardless of the on off state of the car taillights However brightness may be set to 90 in accordance to the external auto light sensor Upon selecting AUTO LIGHT the dis play is automatically brightened or darkened in accordance to external brightness Adjusting the Volume 1 Use the PWR VOLUME button on the REAR panel to adjust the sound vol ume in the rear of the vehicle 23 87 7 Miz mA eA EA 2 When adjusting the sound volume the volume level will be displayed as a number on the Panel display and Roof Mount monitor NOTICE The volume for the REAR is controlled in accordance to the volume level set for the FRONT Although the volume for the REAR can be set to a level lower than the FRONT it cannot be set to a volume level higher than the FRONT as set through the FRONT system Features of your vehicle FM AM mode Starting FM AM mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display a screen allowing the 6 modes of FM AM SIRIUS CDC AUX DVDP to be selected 2
234. iently loading cargo or a roof car e When carrying large objects on rier To move the crossbar pull the lever the roof rack make sure they do and move the crossbar to the desired not exceed the overall roof length position Release the lever and lock the or width crossbar by moving the crossbar slightly forward or rearward For your convenience and to prevent damage with an assistant on the oppo site side of the vehicle pull and hold the lever on each side then move the cross bar to the desired position Features of your vehicle OHM048145 a D290200AEN Side step if equipped When entering or exiting the vehicle use the side step for your convenience Features of your vehicle AUDIO SYSTEM Roof antenna if equipped The roof antenna is removable To remove the roof antenna turn it counter J CAUTION clockwise To install the roof antenna e Do not clean the inside of the rear turn it clockwise quarter glass with a cleaner or use a scraper to remove any for A CAUTION eign deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements e Avoid adding metallic coating such as Ni Cd and so on These can interfere with FM reception e Before entering a place with a low height clearance be sure that the roof antenna Is removed Be sure to remove the roof anten na before washing the car in an automatic car wash or it may be damaged e When reinstalling your roof antenna it is important that it is
235. including interference that may cause undesired operation Features of your vehicle OHM048004 D040400AHM Restrictions in handling keys When leaving keys with parking lot and valet attendants the following proce dures will ensure that your vehicle s glove box compartment can not be opened in your absence 1 Press and hold the release button 1 and remove the mechanical key 2 Close and then lock the glove box using the mechanical key 3 Leave the smart key with the atten dant The glove box can not be opened without the mechanical key See ee cereal Features of your vehicle REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY IF EQUIPPED E Type A E Type B OHM048003 Remote keyless entry system operations D020101AHM EU Lock 1 All doors and tailgate are locked if the lock button is pressed If all doors and tailgate are closed the hazard warning lights will blink for smart key the chime also sounds once to indi cate that all doors and tailgate are locked However if any door or tailgate remains open the hazard warning lights and or the chime will not operate But if all doors and tailgate are closed after the lock button is pressed the hazard warn ing lights will blink once D020102BHM EU Unlock 2 The driver s door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the driver s door is unlocked All doors and tailgate are
236. installed and operating correctly If your trailer weighs more than the max imum trailer weight without trailer brakes loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you ll be able to install adjust and maintain them properly e Don t tap into your vehicle s brake sys tem Se Driving your vehicle E140400ASA Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you must get to know your trailer Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly so responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check the trailer hitch and platform safety chains electrical connector s lights tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric brakes start your vehicle and trailer mov ing and then apply the trailer brake con troller by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electri cal connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lights and trailer brakes are still working E140401AUN Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi cle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can
237. ion could occur See eee cies Features of your vehicle D010301AUN EC Limp home override procedure When you turn the ignition switch to the ON position if the immobilizer indicator goes off after blinking 5 times your transponder equipped in the ignition key is out of order You cannot start the engine without the lime home procedure To start the engine you have to input your password by using the ignition switch The following procedure is how to input your password of 2345 as an example 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion The immobilizer indicator will blink 5 times and go off indicating the beginning of the limp home proce dure 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position 3 To enter the first digit in this example 2 turn the ignition switch to the ON and ACC position twice Perform the same procedure for the next digits between 3 seconds and 10 seconds for example for 3 turn the ignition ON and ACC 3 times 4 If all of the digits have been input suc cessfully you have to start the engine within 30 seconds If you attempt to start the engine after 30 seconds the engine will not start and you will have to input your password again After performing the limp home proce dure you have to see an authorized KIA dealer immediately to inspect and repair your ignition key or immobilizer system Features of your vehicle SMART KEY IF EQUIPPED
238. ips e To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the venti lation system temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irrita tion has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable e Air for the heating cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves snow ice or other obstructions e To prevent interior fog on the wind shield set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position turn on the air condi tioning system and adjust the temper ature control to desired temperature D230503AHM Air conditioning if equipped All KIA Air Conditioning Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R 134a refrigerant which does not dam age the ozone layer 1 Start the engine Press the air condi tioning button 2 Set the mode to the position 3 Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position 4 Adjust the fan speed control and tem perature control to maintain maximum comfort e When maximum cooling is desired set the temperature control to the extreme left position set the mode control to the MAX A C position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed See ee cee el Features of yo
239. is is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers E160700AUN EU GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the cer tification label located on the drivers door sill Road warning 6 2 In case of an emergency while driving 6 2 If the engine will not start 6 3 Emergency starting 6 4 If the engine overheats 6 6 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS 6 7 If you have a flat tire 6 12 Towing 6 20 What to do in an emergency 6 What to do in an emergency ROAD WARNING a OHMO068001N F010100ASA Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching overtaking or passing your vehicle It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehi cle is stopped near the edge of a road way Depress the flasher switch with the igni tion switch in any position The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously e The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not e The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING F020100AUN EU If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing If the engine stalls at a
240. isplay the MODE selection screen 2 lf the key on the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode 3 While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the select area to CDC DVDP mode and press the joystick key to enter 4 If the CDC mode is selected the DISC selection screen displaying the No 1 6 DISC becomes displayed If the DVDP mode is selected the MP3 already inserted in the DVD PLAYER will begin playing CDC mp3 RDM Pri POP Beyonce Knowles Deja Vu _ w e 5 When in CDC mode use the 4 direc tion joystick on the REAR panel to move to the select area of the DISC where the MP3 has been inserted and press the joystick key to begin playing Starting MP3 mode by use of Rear remote control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the DISC button on the REAR Remote Control will display the most recently operated mode between CDC mode and DVDP mode In addi tion pressing the DISC key will change the mode in CDC DVDP CDC order 2 When in CDC mode use the 4 direc tion joystick on the REAR panel to move to the select area of the DISC where the MP3 has been inserted and press the select button on the remote control to begin playing x NOTICE If there are no discs already inserted in the CD Changer or the DVD player pressing
241. isted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you nor mally would The stopping distance how ever will be longer When the engine is not running the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted Pump the brake pedal only when neces sary to maintain steering control on slip pery surfaces Driving your vehicle E070101AUN In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake The stopping distance however will be much greater than normal E070102AHM Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal Please remember that some driving con ditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply or lightly apply the brakes This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes A CAUTION e To avoid costly brake repairs do not continue to drive with worn brake pads e Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs OHM058021 Parking brake
242. itch longer than necessary the motor may be damaged Do not attempt to adjust the out side rearview mirror by hand Doing so may damage the parts D140202AHM EU Folding the outside rearview mirror To fold the outside rearview mirror grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle OHM048220N Features of your vehicle INSTRUMENT CLUSTER E Type A a a E80 OFF me Hy ae H E7 mi F Fi 4 1 Tachometer 2 Turn signal indicators 3 Speedometer 4 Engine temperature gauge 5 Warning and indicator lights 6 Shift position indicator 7 Odometer atl i 8 Trip computer 9 Fuel gauge Sa 10 LCD display all ipped j 100 120 140 sc if equippe 160 2 o g 180 A The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration For more details refer to the Gauges in the next pages OHM049042C OHM049043C Features of your vehicle OHM048044N D150100AHM EE Instrument panel illumination if equipped When the vehicle s parking lights or headlights are on rotate the illumination control knob to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination The instrument cluster Type B bright ness of the instrument panel illumination can be adjusted by rotating the control knob with the headlight switch in any position when the ignition switch is in the ON position E Type A OHM048045L E Type B 120 440 100 pn 140 2X L
243. ized KIA deal er Malfunctions caused by improper alterations adjustments or modifi cations to the theft alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty Features of your vehicle DOOR LOCKS ll Unlock D050100AHM EU Operating door locks from out side the vehicle e Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock If you lock the driver s door with a key all vehicle doors will lock automatically e From the driver s door turn the key to the right once to unlock the door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors OHM048002L e Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter e Once the doors are unlocked they may be opened by pulling the door handle e When closing the door push the door by hand Make sure the doors are closed securely x NOTICE e In cold and wet climates door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions e If the door is locked unlocked multi ple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components Y OHM048007N e To lock a door without the key push the inside door lock button 1 or central door lock switch 2 to the Lock posi tion and close the door 3 e If you lock the door with the central doo
244. k even though the front portion 1 of the central door lock switch is pressed DO50300AAM EE Impact sensing door unlock sys tem if equipped In the event of air bag deployment result ing from a vehicle impact all doors will automatically unlock D050400AHM EU Auto door lock unlock feature All doors will automatically lock when the transmission shift lever is shifted out of P Park All doors will automatically unlock when the transmission shift lever is shifted into P Park See eee oe eel Features of your vehicle x NOTICE An authorized KIA dealer can activate or deactivate some auto door lock unlock features as follows Speed sensing auto door lock e Auto door unlock by using the dri ver s door lock button Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch Auto door lock unlock by shifting the transmission shift lever out of P Park or into P Park If you want to activate or deactivate some door lock unlock feature consult an authorized KIA dealer DO50500AEN Child protector rear door lock The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from accidentally open ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehi cle 1 Open the rear door 2 Push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock a position When the child safety lock is in
245. l the seat belt into tighter contact against the occu pant s body If the system senses excessive seat belt tension on the driver or passenger s seat belt when the pre tensioner activates the load limiter inside the pre tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt x NOTICE The pre tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision or rollover if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag 2 3 Sa os E4BLA300 The seat belt pre tensioner system con sists mainly of the following components Their locations are shown in the illustra tion 1 SRS air bag warning light 2 Retractor pre tensioner assembly 3 SRS control module Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE Both the driver s and front passen ger s pre tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal collisions or side collisions or rollovers The pre tensioners will not be activat ed if the seat belts are not being worn at the time of the collision When the pre tensioner seat belts are activated a loud noise may be heard and fine dust which may appear to be smoke may be visible in the passenger compartment These are normal oper ating conditions and are not haz ardous Although it is harmless the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged peri ods Wash all exposed skin areas thor oughly after an accident in which the pre
246. ld After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn t been driven more than 1 6 km 1 mile since startup e Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires e Never overload your vehicle Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one e Worn old tires can cause acci dents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Maintenance G200300AUN Checking tire inflation pressure Check your tires once a month or more Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire G200301AUN How to check Use a good quality gage to check tire pressure You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by look ing at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they re underinflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 6 km 1 mile Maintenance Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firm ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label no further adjust ment is necessary If the pressure is low add air until you reach the rec ommended amount If you overfill the tire release air by pushing on the metal stem in the
247. le quality reproduction However in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear This can be due to factors such as the dis tance from the radio station closeness of other strong radio stations or the pres ence of buildings bridges or other large obstructions in the area AM MW LW reception JBMO002 AM MW LW broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts This is because AM MW LW radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies These long low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere In addition they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage FM radio station Mountains JBM003 FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth s surface Because of this FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station Also FM signals are easily affected by build ings mountains or other obstructions These can result in certain listening con ditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio The fol lowing conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble a ent yal Features of your vehicle Using a cellular phone or a two way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle noise may be produced from the audio equipment This does not mean that something is
248. lean tight and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time disconnect the bat tery cables Maintenance O_O eee G190200AUN Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance free calcium based battery e If the battery becomes discharged in a short time because for example the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use recharge it by slow charging trickle for 10 hours e If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used recharge it at 20 30A for two hours Maintenance OC G190300AHM Reset items Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected e Auto up down window See section 4 e Sunroof See section 4 e Driver position memory system See section 4 Trip computer See section 4 e Climate control system See section 4 e Clock See section 4 e Audio See section 4 Maintenance TIRES AND WHEELS G200100AUN Tire care For proper maintenance safety and maximum fuel economy you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle G200200AUN EU Recommended cold tire inflation pressures All
249. ler lid 1 To install the cap turn it clockwise until it clicks This indicates that the cap is securely tightened 2 Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly and making sure that it is securely closed D100300AHM EC Features of your vehicle 4 WARNING Refueling dan gers Automotive fuels are flammable materials When refueling please note the following guidelines care fully Failure to follow these guide lines may result in severe personal injury severe burns or death by fire or explosion e Read and follow all warning post ed at the gas station facility Before refueling note the loca tion of the Emergency Gasoline Shut Off if available at the gas station facility Before touching the fuel nozzle you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis charge by touching another metal part of the vehicle a safe dis tance away from the fuel filler neck nozzle or other gas source Continued Continued e Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by touching rubbing or sliding against any item or fab ric polyester satin nylon etc capable of producing static elec tricity Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning If you must re enter the vehicle you should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis charge by touching a metal part of the ve
250. light Side repeater lights Front side marker lights Front fog lights Stop and tail lights Tail light Rear turn signal lights Back up lights Rear side marker lights High mounted stop light License plate lights Map lamps Room lamps Luggage lamp Glove box lamp Vanity mirror lamps Door courtesy lamps Wattage 55 If equipped Specifications amp Consumer information TIRES AND WHEELS lO20000AHM EU Cold tire inflation pressure kPa psi Wheel lug nut Tire dize Wheel size Normal speed load High speed Maximum load torque kg m Ibeft Nem _ Heat ear Gont tire 32 32 33 33 Q 11 420 420 pee um yy _ a spare tire See ee ee eal Specifications amp Consumer information RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES l040000BHM EC To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability use only lubricants of the proper quality The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle Classification Engine oil 3 8 Engine 5 2 1 5 49 US qt Pe drain and refill 4 6 Engine 6 71 7 0 US qt REL ROUIGO ON alae rE OT AGONG Automatic 3 8 Engine 10 0 10 56 US qt APOLLOIL ATF RED 1K transmission fluid 4 6 Engine 9 3 1 9 85 US at SHELL ATF M1375 4 Power steering 0 9 0 95 US at PSF 3 Coan 3 8 Engine 10 7 1 11 3 US qt Mixture of antifreeze
251. light red 4 Ground white A service connector is equipped in your vehicle for the towing brake controller as shown Link the connector to the towing brake controller with the sub wire har ness stored in the glove box The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness cir cuit is shown in the picture Be sure to position the towing brake controller where it does not interfere with the driver from operating the pedal We recommend that the sub wire har ness be stored in the glove box when it is not in use E140800AHM Trailer light connector Your vehicle is equipped with a wire har ness stored in the rear end underbody Use it to connect and operate the trailer lights However the trailer lights must comply with federal state provincial and local regulations See your local recre ational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for your trailer Check for correct operation of the turn signals tail back up and stop lights each time you hitch up Direct splic ing may damage your vehicle s electrical system and cause a malfunction of your lights Driving your vehicle VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION PNEUS ET CHARGE INFORMAT ION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 7 FROWT 2 REAR WOMBRE DE SIEGES TOTAL 7 AVANT ght of secupenta and cargo should never excaed 24 bg or 1 157 Iba Le poldi comblind dis occupante ef du chargesent oe dalk Jamals enobdersza bg ow 1 1
252. ling Vapor Recovery system The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos phere The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere See eee eo Maintenance O_O G270201AUN Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister When the engine is running the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid valve G270202AHM Purge Control Solenoid Valve PCSV The purge control solenoid valve is con trolled by the Engine Control Module ECM when the engine coolant temper ature is low during idling the PCSV clos es so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine After the engine warms up during ordinary driving the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine G270300AUN 3 Exhaust emission control system The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performance G270301AUN Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations In addition damage or performan
253. llision Also the side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor Although the front air bags driver s and front passenger s air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions they also may inflate in other types of colli sions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact Side impact and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollovers But they may inflate in other type of collisions or similar rollover situations if the side impact sensors or rollover sensor detect a sufficient impact or rollover If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads the air bags may deploy Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment 1VQA2086 C040802AHM Air bag non inflation conditions e In certain low speed collisions the air bags may not deploy The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions Safety features of your vehicle OUN036087 e Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact In this case inflated air bags would not be able to provide any addi tional benefit L o 0VQ036018N e Front air bags may not infla
254. lm which could interfere with sensor operation If your vehicle has window tint or other types of coating on the front windshield the Auto light system may not work properly OHM049069L D190500AUN High beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights push the lever away from you Pull it back for low beams The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on To prevent the battery from being dis charged do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running Features of your vehicle OHM048068L To flash the headlights pull the lever towards you It will return to the normal low beam position when released The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature OHM048070L D190600AHM Turn signals and lane change sig nals The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function To turn on the turn signals move the lever up or down A The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn sig nal is operating They will self cancel after a turn is completed If the indicator continues to flash after a turn manually return the lever to the OFF position To signal a lane change move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position B The lever will return to the OFF posi tion when released If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally one of the turn signal bulb
255. lt jumper system You can damage a 12 volt starting motor ignition system and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24 volt power supply either two 12 volt batteries in series or a 24 volt motor generator set Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order What to do in an emergency F040101ASA Jump starting procedure 1 Make sure the booster battery is 12 volt and that its negative terminal is grounded 2 lf the booster battery is in another vehicle do not allow the vehicles to come in contact 3 Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery 1 then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery 2 Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative ter minal of the booster battery 3 then the other end to a solid stationary metallic point for example the engine lifting bracket away from the battery 4 Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked Do not allow the jumper cables to con tact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground Do not lean over the battery when making connections CAUTION Battery cables Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the n
256. ltale Malfunction indicator l ECO iife ECO indicator HS For more detailed explanations refer to Instrument cluster in section 4 uipped Q Your vehicle at a glance Interior overview 2 2 Instrument panel overview 2 3 Engine compartment 2 4 Your vehicle at a glance INTERIOR OVERVIEW 1 Door lock unlock buiton 4 16 2 Outside rearview mirror control SWE hee eee ae ree msc eens une 4 47 mE 3 Central door lock Switch 4 16 FF Leama 4 Power window lock button 4 24 ies a 5 Power window switches scce 4 21 y GAF VONT AR E E R Lorn ee 4 89 7 Instrument illuminati panel illumination COMMORKM OD asta ara enor ane nee 4 49 BS ESC OFF DUHOM ecto case eee oe 5 32 GA DBC DUHOM er sn re ee 5 36 10 Power adjustable pedal COMOIZSWIEC Iie sees en na ere ee cee 4 36 11 4WD transfer shift knob 5 19 12 Steering wheel tilt control 4 38 13 Steering wheel ses eee 4 37 PAPI SE OOK ere een eee T 7 43 15 Hood release lever 4 25 16 Fuel filler lid release lever 4 27 17 Brakepedal tenor seater ora 5 27 18 Accelerator pedal aee 59 19 Driver position memory SVSICMOUUONS a a iam 4 34 AQ Wiss 21s ior Beene E T E MWe 3 2 BO10000AHM EU Your vehicle at a glance INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW 1 Instrument CIUStCK cic cccrseceeters eevee 4 48 2 Steering wheel audio controls 4 125 3 Light controls Tur
257. luid level in the reservoir peri odically The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir Maintenance POWER STEERING FLUID OHMO078006N G090100AHM Checking the power steering fluid level With the vehicle on level ground check the fluid level in the power steering reser voir periodically The fluid should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir at the normal tem perature Before adding power steering fluid thor oughly clean the area around the reser voir cap to prevent power steering fluid contamination If the level is low add fluid to the MAX level NOTICE Check that the fluid level is in the HOT range on the reservoir If the fluid is cold check that it is in the COLD range In the event the power steering system requires frequent addition of fluid the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION e To avoid damage to the power steering pump do not operate the vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering fluid level Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty When adding fluid be careful that dirt does not get into the tank Too little fluid can result in increased steering effort and or noise from the power steering system The use of the non specified fluid could reduce the effectiveness of the power steering system and cause damage to it Use only the specified power steeri
258. ly a USB device formatted to FAT 12 16 32 USB devices without USB IF authentication may not be recog nizable Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with human bodies or external objects If you repeat mounting and unmounting the USB device in a short period of time it may break the device You may hear a strange noise when mounting or dismounting a USB device Continued Continued If you dismount the external USB device during playback in USB mode the external USB device can be damaged or malfunction Therefore mount the external USB device when the engine is turned off or in another mode Depending on the type and capac ity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device but this is not an indicator of trouble and you only have to wait Do not use the USB device for other purposes than playing music files Use of USB accessories such as recharger or heater using USB I F may lower performance or cause trouble If you use devices such as a USB hub purchased separately the vehicle s audio system may not recognize the USB device Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle Continued Features of your vehicle Continued e If USB device is divided by logical Continued e Please avoid using USB memory drives only the music files on the highest priori
259. m causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint sys tem To secure a child restraint system use the following procedure OENO036101 To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats do the fol lowing 1 Place the child restraint system in the seat and route the lap shoulder belt around or through the restraint follow ing the restraint manufacturer s instructions Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted 2 Fasten the lap shoulder belt latch into the buckle Listen for the distinct click sound Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency OEN036102 3 Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extend ed it will shift the retractor to the Auto Lock child restraint mode See eee Safety features of your vehicle OEN036103 4 Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible clicking or ratcheting sound This indicates that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode If no distinct sound is heard repeat steps 3 and 4 OEN036104 5 Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor 6 Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly
260. modes scan be adjusted as above Although the hierarchy dif fers Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Hierarchy 5 Playlist Playlists Songs Artist Artists Albums Songs Album Albums Songs Song Songs Genre Genres Artists Albums Songs Composer Composers Albums Songs Features of your vehicle x NOTICE Using iPod device Some iPod models might not support the communication protocol and the files will not be played iPod models supported Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in the audio system If the iPod crashes due to its own trou ble reset iPod Reset Refer to iPod manual iPod may not operate normally on low battery N CAUTION Using iPod device e You need the power cable exclu sive for iPod in order to operate iPod with the buttons on the audio system The PC cable pro vided by Apple may cause mal function and do not use it for vehicle use Continued Continued When connecting the device with iPod cable push in the jack fully not to interfere with communica tion When adjusting the sound effects of iPod and the audio system the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or dis tort the quality of the sound Deactivate turn off the equalizer function of iPod when adjusting the audio system s volume and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using
261. n or after the engine is started If the front passenger seat is occupied the occupant detection sensor will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds Safety features of your vehicle Continued If you change the weight on the Continued e Air bags can only be used once WARNING e Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detection system never install a child restraint system in the front passenger s seat A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injuries or death Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat Children too large for child restraints should use the avail able lap shoulder belts No mat ter what type of crash children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated when the front passenger s seat is occupied by an adult and he she sits properly sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor have that person sit in the rear seat Continued front passenger seat the PAS SENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor may turn on or off for a few seconds disabling or enabling the passenger air bag Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat Don t place any thing on or attach anything such as a blanket or seat heater to the fron
262. n signals T n 4 73 ANOT eee epee E A ee ene 4 38 5 Auto cruise COMMOIS ciie S 6 Wiper Washer switCh c 4 77 1 Drivers tront anba a a e 3 52 8 Drivers knee air bag ceeee 352 9 Ignition switch or ENGINE START STOP button 5 4 5 6 10 Hazard warning flasher 6 2 11 Audio or Navigation 4 130 Da i 12i Dignakclock Ta a a eaten 4 119 fe i ia aa Pl fh Je a 13 Climate controllsystem m 4 84 eae 14 Power outlet n eoeta 4 116 S MUDO A E cee eee cers 4 113 16 SMEETS 5 12 17 Aux USB and iPod port 2 2 4 126 18 Seat warmer switch cc eeeeees 3 8 19 Climate control seat switch See 20 Rear parking assist system Oise SWING linen ttn eee 4 68 21 AC inverter switch a an 4 117 22 Parking brake pedal 5 28 23 Blake pedal etn eee eee 5 27 24 Accelerator pedal ccccceeeeeeees See 25 Passenger s front air bag 3 53 267 GIOVE DO eee oe eee 4 112 if equipped OHM018002N B020000AHM EE 213 Your vehicle at a glance ENGINE COMPARTMENT E 3 8L 1 Engine coolant reservol eis 2 Engine oil filler cap ernes 7 14 3 Brake fluid reservoir ccceeeeee 7 18 ATA CIGAING I oarre e a a eae 7 21 SaaS a E E ate senaee 7 44 E 4 6L 6 Negative battery terminal 7 25 7 Positive battery terminal 7 25 8 Radiado
263. nd grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged Engine oil viscosity thickness has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating engine start and engine oil flowability Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance however higher viscosity engine oils are required for sat isfactory lubrication in hot weather Using oils of any viscosity other than those rec ommended could result in engine dam age viscosity from the chart Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 10 0 80 40 100 50 120 Temperature F Gasoline Engine Oil 1 For better fuel economy it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W 20 API SM ILSAC GF 4 However if the engine oil is not available in your country select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart When choosing an oil consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be oper ated in before the next oil change Proceed to select the recommended oil See a ee el Specifications amp Consumer information VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION VEHICLE CERTIFICATION NUMBER VIN LABEL VIN label if equipped Frame number OHM088008N a OHM088002N Frame number if equipped The VIN is also on a plate attached to H020000AUN the top of the dashboard The number The vehicle certification label attached on th
264. ne is running Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the average speed is being displayed or after the engine stops and 2 hours elapsed clears the average speed to zero E lype B OHM048058N Elapsed time if equipped This mode indicates the total time trav eled since the last driving time reset Even if the vehicle is not in motion the driving time keeps going while the engine is running The meters working range is from 0 00 99 59 Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the driving time is being displayed or after the engine stops and 2 hours elapsed clears the driving time to zero 0 00 See ee Se ere Features of your vehicle E Type A E Type A m Type B OHM048236C Average fuel consumption if equipped This mode calculates the average fuel consumption from the total fuel used and the distance since the last average con sumption reset The total fuel used is cal culated from the fuel consumption input For an accurate calculation drive more than 50 m 0 03 miles Pressing the RESET button for more than 1 second when the average fuel con sumption is being displayed clears the average fuel consumption to zero If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km h after being refueled the average fuel con sumption will be cleared to zero E Type B r 00km TTT 0 10 20 OHM048237L Instant fuel consumption if equipped This mode calculates the instan
265. nected message Features of your vehicle Connecting an external VIDEO player 1 An auxiliary AUDIO amp VIDEO player camcorder vehicle VCR etc can be connected for viewing VIDEO O AUDIO 2 The AUX jack is positioned next to the POWER OUTLET on the backside of the consol box located in between the driver and passenger seat x NOTICE 1 Among the auxiliary VIDEO connec tor jacks the yellow is for video red is for right side audio and white is for left side audio 2 This device supports the NTSC color system Other systems beside NTSC will not be supported 3 The recommended audio input stan dard for this device is max 1Vrms Input which exceeds this value may cause dete riorated sound quality Starting AUX mode by use of Rear remote control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the AUX button on the REAR Remote Control will display the AUX screen corresponding to the con nected device In addition each time the AUX button on the Remote Control is pressed the corresponding AUX mode for the connected devices will become displayed a ee el Features of your vehicle DVD language code CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION 0101 Afar 0625 Frisian 1222 Latvian 1912 Slovenian 0102 Abkhazian 0701 Irish 1307 Malagasy 1913 Samoan 0113 Amharic 0712 Gallegan 1311 Macedonian 1915 Somal 0118 Arabic 0714 Guarani 1312 Malayalam 1917 Albanian 0119 Assamese
266. nes displayed can be directly inputted for selection 3 If the OTHERS button is selected the voice language code input screen will be displayed Input the desired code 4 If a proper code is inputted the DVD setup screen will be returned and dis play the set voice language 5 Press the DONE button to complete the changes and replay from the beginning Setting subtitle language 1 Press the subtitle language button in the DVD setup screen 2 Select the desired subtitle language Press the OTHER button to set a differ ent subtitle Press the SUBTITLE OFF button to turn off the subtitle display 3 The method of inputting subtitle lan guage code is the same as the method of inputting voice language code Setting menu language 1 Press the menu language button in the DVD setup screen 2 Select the desired menu language Press the OTHER button to display a different menu language 3 The method of inputting the menu lan guage code is the same as the method of inputting voice language code x NOTICE Please refer to the Language Code page at the back of the user manual The set values will not be applied in the case of playing a DISC which does not support the currently set language or the current settings Searching title chapter 1 While playing select the search 2 When searching for titles press the TITLE button e DVDP pvo ake Features of your vehicle Using the Interactive Menu
267. ng fluid Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in section 8 G090200AEN Checking the power steering hose Check the connections for oil leaks dam age and twists in the power steering hose before driving Maintenance WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE OHMo58021 OHM078007N G140100AHM Checking the parking brake Check whether the stroke is within spec ification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 20 kg 44 lb 196 N of force Also the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fair ly steep grade If the stroke is more or less than specified have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized KIA dealer G120100AUN Checking the washer fluid level The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available However use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli mates to prevent freezing Stroke 4 5 notch Maintenance AIR CLEANER G160100AAM EC Filter replacement It must be replaced when necessary and should not be washed You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element Clean the filter by using compressed air Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas repla
268. nish e Do not use any abrasive cleaner pol ishing compound solvent or wire brushes on aluminum wheels They may scratch or damage the finish Use only mild soap or neutral deter gent and rinse thoroughly with water Also be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads This helps pre vent corrosion Avoid washing the wheels with high speed car wash brushes Do not use any cleaners containing acid or acid detergents It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish See eee Maintenance O_O G230107AHM Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corrosion By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corro sion we produce vehicles of the highest quality However this is only part of the job To achieve the long term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver the owner s cooperation and assistance is also required Common causes of corrosion The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are Road salt dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones gravel abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unpro tected metal exposed to corrosion High corrosion areas If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materi als corrosion protection is particularly important Some of the common causes of accelerate
269. not be recognized If the command is not recognized the system will announce Pardon or No input voice signal from microphone No response The system shall cancel voice recogni tion mode in following cases When pressing the button and saying cancel following the beep When not making a call and pressing the but ton When voice recognition has failed 3 consecutive times Features of your vehicle e At any time if you say help the system will announce what commands are available E Menu tree Select phone Delete phone Change priority Bluetooth off Phonebook Delete name By number m Phone Setup e Pairing phone To use the hands free system you need to register your phone in the system Up to 5 phones can be registered in the system 1 Press the button 2 Say Set Up 3 Say Pair Phone 4 Say Yes 5 Say the name of the contact 6 Say Yes 7 The Pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellu lar phone Xx NOTICE The system may not function in the fol lowing cases If 5 phones have already been registered If the system cannot communicate with the phone e To connect phone The registered phones can be selected When the system connects to Bluetooth the phone previously used is automati cally selected Select a different phone if necessary Only the selected phone can be used with the hands free system 1 Press
270. not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure G201006AUN 6 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire When replacing the tires on the vehicle always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire G2010007AHM 7 Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi mum section width For example TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A Maintenance r TC Tread wear The tread wear grade is a compara tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern ment test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half times 11 2 as well on the gov ernment course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate These grades are molded on the side walls of passenger vehicle tires The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade Traction AA A B amp C The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B
271. ns what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean Example tire size designation These numbers are provided as an example only your tire size designa tor could vary depending on your vehicle P245 70R17 108T P Applicable vehicle type tires marked with the prefix P are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks however not all tires have this marking 245 Tire width in millimeters 70 Aspect ratio The tire s section height as a percentage of its width R Tire construction code Radial 17 Rim diameter in inches 108 Load Index a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry T Speed Rating Symbol See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information Maintenance r TC Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one The follow ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa tion mean Example wheel size designation 7 0JX17 7 0 Rim width in inches J Rim contour designation 17 Rim diameter in inches Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire This symbol corresponds to that tire s designed maximum safe oper ating speed Maximum Spee
272. nt system with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt To fasten your seat belt pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab 1 into the buckle 2 There will be an audible click when the tab locks into the buckle The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt por tion is adjusted manually so that it fits Snugly around your hips If you lean for ward in a slow easy motion the belt will extend and let you move around If there is a sudden stop or impact however the belt will lock into position It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly Safety features of your vehicle x NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor firmly pull the belt out and release it Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly Front seat Height adjustment You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 5 positions for maximum comfort and safety The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too near your neck The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck 1 OHM038027 To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position To raise the height adjuster pull it up 1 To lower it push it down 3 while press ing the height adjuster button 2 Release
273. ntarily to the second detent posi tion 6 completely lowers the driver s window even when the switch is released To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation momentarily pull the switch in the direction opposite of the window s movement Features of your vehicle OHM048015 D080103AHM EU Auto up down window if equipped Driver s window Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position 6 completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation pull up or press down and release the switch If the power window does not operate normally the automatic power window system must be reset as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Close the driver s window and contin ue pulling up the drivers power win dow switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed 2355 0UN026013 Automatic reversal If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement The window will then lower approximately 30 cm 11 8 in to allow the object to be cleared If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously the window will stop upward movement then lower approxi mately 2 5 cm 1 in And if the po
274. nute between 2 000 rpm and 4 000 rpm e Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time either fast or slow Varying engine speed is needed to properly break in the engine e Avoid hard stops except in emergen cies to allow the brakes to seat prop erly e Don t let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time e Don t tow a trailer during the first 2 000 km 1 200 miles of operation Introduction INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER A050000BHM EU Door ajar warning light 33 ESC indicator Air bag warning light J gt Door open position indi ESC ESC OFF indicator cator OFF Cruise indicator CRUISE NN _ VT OY Parking brake amp Brake fluid Wee warning light Sj am Cruise SET indicator DBC indicator Immobilizer indicator Tailgate open warning light Seat belt warning light my4 Engine oil pressure warning light High beam indicator FA 4WD system warning light PI SEN 4WD am Light on indicator LOW 4WD LOW indicator Low fuel level warning light 1d oL4T pe 4WD HI Front fog light indicator Low windshield washer fluid _ d 7d fi a Turn signal indicator 4WD HI indicator I i level warning light BAN Si TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction indicator ABS warning light Charging system warning light E Engine coolant temperature we warning light Low tire pressure tel
275. o modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack Safety features of your vehicle 1GQA2083 C020101AHM EU Seat belt warning As a reminder to the driver the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approxi mately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will blink till the 6 seconds and the warn ing chime will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km h 6 mph the seat belt warning light and chime will operate for approximately 11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 5 km h 3 mph Qype x v Egi 4 tf B180A01NF 1 C020102BHM EU Seat belt Driver s 3 poi
276. o the front of the vehicle raise the hood slightly pull up the secondary latch 1 inside of the hood center and lift the hood 2 3 Raise the hood It will completely raise by itself after it has been raised about halfway DO90200AHM Closing the hood 1 Before closing the hood check the fol lowing e All filler caps in the engine compart ment must be correctly installed e Gloves rags or any other com bustible material must be removed from the engine compartment 2 Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle FUEL FILLER LID i OHM048021N D100100AHM Opening the fuel filler lid The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling out the fuel filler lid opener lever located on the dri vers door Xx NOTICE If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid Do not pry on the lid If necessary spray around the lid with an approved de icer fluid do not use radiator anti freeze or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt pan OHM048022 1 Stop the engine 2 To open the fuel filler lid pull out the fuel filler lid opener 3 Pull open the fuel filler lid 1 4 To remove the cap turn the fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise 5 Refuel as needed D100200AUN Closing the fuel fil
277. on 3 Move the shift lever If the brake pedal is repeatedly depressed and released with the shift lever in the P Park position a chattering noise near the shift lever may be heard It is a normal condition OHMO58006N Shift lock override If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P Park or N Neutral position into the R Reverse position even though the brake pedal is depressed continue depressing the brake pedal then do the following 1 Carefully remove the cap covering the shift lock access hole 2 Insert a key or screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the key or screwdriver 3 Move the shift lever 4 Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized KIA dealer immediately ee Driving your vehicle E060103AHM Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P Park position If the shift lever is in any other position the key cannot be removed EO60200AHM Good driving practices Never move the gear shift lever from P Park or N Neutral to any other posi tion with the accelerator pedal depressed Never move the gear shift lever into P Park when the vehicle is in motion Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R Reverse or D Drive Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill This may be extremely hazardous Always leave the car in gear when moving Do not ride the
278. or mod erate severity impacts A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts The passenger s front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sit ting close to the instrument panel in low speed collisions However children are safer if they are restraint in the rear seat According to the impact severity and seat belt usage the SRSCM SRS Control Module controls the air bag inflation Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident Se ae Se Seco Safety features of your vehicle Additionally your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger s seat The occupant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger s seat and will turn off the front passenger s air bag under certain conditions For more detail see Occupant detection system in this section Safety features of your vehicle NOTICE Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the sun visor e Advanced air bags are combined with pre tensioner seat belts to help pro vide enhanced occupant protection in frontal crashes Safety features of your vehicle Rear impact e p N j r FO D __ OEPO36096N eo aAa e Side impact gt Uf gt 5 OVQ036018N ie Rollover as 1VQA2091 Safety features of your vehicle
279. orless odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia tion e Be sure the exhaust system does not leak The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer e Do not run the engine in an enclosed area Letting the engine idle in your garage even with the garage door open is a hazardous practice Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out e Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at Fresh and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary 1 Close all windows 2 Open side vents 3 Set the air intake control at Fresh the air flow control at Floor or Face and the fan at one of the higher speeds To assure proper operation of the ventilation system be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow ice leaves or other obstructions
280. ossible D150304AHM EU Seat belt warning fh As a reminder to the driver the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned on the seat belt warning light and the seat belt warning chime will operate for approxi mately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will blink till the 6 seconds and the warn ing chime will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is disconnected after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the seat belt warning light will blink for approximately 6 seconds But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds the warning light will turn off immediately If the driver s seat belt is not fastened when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km h 6 mph the seat belt warning light and chime will operate approximately 11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and 24 seconds off until the belt is fastened or the vehicle speed decreases below 5 km h 3 mph D150305AHM Turn signal indicator lt The blinking green arrows on the instru ment panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals If the arrow comes on but does not blink blinks more rapidly than normal or does not illuminate at all it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig nal system You should consult your deal er for repairs D15
281. ould go out If any of the following conditions occurs this indicates a malfunction of the SRS Have an authorized KIA dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible e The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON e The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds e The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion Driver s front air bag 1 OHM039102N The front air bag modules are located in the center of the steering wheel in the front passenger s panel above the glove box and or in the driver s side knee bol ster When the SRSCM detects a suffi ciently severe impact to the front of the vehicle it will automatically deploy the front air bags Safety features of your vehicle Driver s front air bag 2 a Driver s front air bag 3 Passenger s front air bag B240B05L Upon deployment tear seams molded A fully inflated air bag in combination directly into the pad covers will separate with a properly worn seat belt slows the under pressure from the expansion of the driver s or the passenger s forward air bags Further opening of the covers motion reducing the risk of head and then allows full inflation of the air bags chest injury After complete inflation the air bag immediately starts deflating enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other con trols Safety features of your vehicle rajiimgen
282. ovement for that component to stop and move in the direction that the control Switch is moved Other components will continue to the recalled position as Features of your vehicle D120300AHM EU Easy access function if equipped With the shift lever in the P Park posi tion the system will move the driver s seat and the steering wheel forward or rearward automatically so you can com fortably enter and exit the vehicle e With ignition key The steering wheel will move away from the driver and the seat will move rearward when the ignition key is removed The steering wheel will move toward the driver and the seat will move for ward when the ignition key is insert ed e With smart key The steering wheel will move away from the driver and the seat will move rearward when the ENGINE START STOP button is in the OFF position The steering wheel will move toward the driver and the seat will move for ward when the ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC position To deactivate or activate the easy access function 1 Shift the transmission shift lever into P Park while the ignition switch is ON 2 Press the SET button and hold it for 10 seconds or more 3 Release the button after one or two beep sounds The system will beep once to indicate the function deactivat ed or twice to indicate the function activated P OHM048032N D120400AHM Reverse parking aid function if equipped
283. ow E can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter if equipped D150319AHM Low washer fluid level warning light if equipped oo oo ea Hye This warning light indicates the washer fluid reservoir is nearly empty Refill the washer fluid as soon as possible Features of your vehicle D150320AHM EU Malfunction indicator MIL check engine light if equipped This indicator light is part of the Engine Control System which monitors various emission control system components If this light illuminates while driving it indi cates that a potential malfunction has been detected somewhere in the emis sion control system This light will also illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi tion and will go out in a few seconds after the engine is started If it illuminates while driving or does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position take your vehicle to your near est authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked Generally your vehicle will continue to be drivable but have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer promptly A CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the emission con trol systems which could effect dri vability and or fuel economy CAUTION If the Emission Control System Malfunction Indicator Light illumi nates potential catalyt
284. ower ON only when the vehicle is not in motion In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button for more than 3 seconds or 3 times successively If the vehicle is still moving you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the N Neutral position Driving your vehicle E030202AHM ACC Accessory Orange indicator Press the ENGINE START STOP button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal The steering wheel unlocks and electri cal accessories are operational If the ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour the button is changed to off automatical ly to prevent battery discharge E030203AHM ON Green indicator Press the ENGINE START STOP button while it is in the ACC position without depressing the brake pedal The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started Do not leave the ENGINE START STOP button in the ON position for a long time The battery may discharge because the engine is not running E030704AHM START RUN Not illuminated To start the engine depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START STOP button with the shift lever in the P Park or the N Normal position For your safety start the engine with the shift lever in
285. ows the vehicle Compass heading in the Display Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings N NE E SE etc Compass function The Compass can be turned ON and OFF and will remember the last state when the ignition is cycled To turn the display feature ON OFF 1 Press and release the turn the display feature OFF 2 Press and release the button again to turn the display back ON Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below button to There is a difference between magnetic north and true north The compass in the mirror can compensate for this difference when it knows the Magnetic Zone in which it is operating This is set either by the dealer or by the user The operating Zone Numbers for North America are shown in the figure on the following sec tion See ee ce ciel Features of your vehicle To adjust the Zone setting 1 Determine the desired Zone Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map 2 Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds the current Zone Number will appear on the display 3 Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to incre ment Note they will repeat 13 14 15 1 2 Releasing the button when the desired Zone Number appears on the display will set the new Zone 4 Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass head ing again T
286. p menu screen 10 TITLE number display The current title number is displayed 11 CHAPTER number display The current chapter number is displayed 12 Play time display The play time of the current title is dis played 13 SUBTITLE button The subtitle can be set for DVD titles supporting Multi Subtitle function 14 AUDIO button The voice language can be set for DVD tiles supporting Multi Language func tion 15 ANGLE button The angle can be set for DVD titles encoded with the Multi Angle function 16 DVD setting button Restores the initial DVD setup screen 17 END button The menu screen will be removed to dis play only the video DVD mode setting If the DVD setup button in the DVD mode menu screen is pressed the setup screen as shown below will become dis played ENGLISH SUBTITLE SE TEE PRE ENGLISH x NOTICE The DVD setup screen is used not to change the settings of the current DVD title but to define the settings of the DVD PLAYER In order to apply the modified valued restart the current DVD from the beginning The set values will not be applied in the case of playing a DISC which does not support the currently set language or the current settings SS ee eis Seal Features of your vehicle Setting voice language 1 Press the voice language button in the DVD setup screen 2 Select the desired voice language If the OTHERS button is pressed lan guages other than the o
287. ped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire measured in kilopascals kPa or pounds per square inch psi before a tire has built up heat from driving Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric des ignator which can also identify the tire manufacturer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle Maintenance r e Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corre sponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maxi mum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per missible inflation pressure for that tire
288. peri odically for wear or damage of any kind Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible C020402AUN Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry If belts become dirty they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water Bleach dye strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric C020403ASA When to replace seat belts The entire in use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident This should be done even if no damage is visible Additional questions concern ing seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized KIA dealer Safety features of your vehicle CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM C030000AHM Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident sudden stop or sudden maneuver According to accident statis tics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country Child and or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the require ments of the safety standards of your country Child restraint sy
289. play The DISC number of the currently play ing song is displayed 8 RDM RPT SCAN function display Displays the RANDOM REPEAT SCAN function settings 9 Folder name display Displays the folder of the currently file 10 File name display Displays the name of the currently play ing file 11 LIST button Moves to the MP3 LIST screen 12 INFO button The information Album name Title Artist of the currently playing file is displayed This function is supported only in MP3 files inputted within information 13 DISC button The CD Changer select screen is dis played NOTICE There is a PLAY PAUSE function with in DVDP MP3 mode ee eas Syed Features of your vehicle MP3 LIST menu screen configuration os Beyonce Knowles Deja Vu Or Omror 33 1 Mode display Display the current LIST screen 2 Folder name display Displays the folder of the current file 3 File name display Displays the name of the current file 4 BACK button The MP3 mode menu screen will become displayed 5 Play time display Displays the play time of the current song 6 LIST UP button Displays the previous LIST 7 LIST DOWN button Displays the next LIST 8 LIST page display The number of MP3 lists Current Page Total Pages is displayed 9 Scroll bar display The location of the folder within the cur rent list is displayed 10 LIST folder display The folder name which shows what fold er the c
290. pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pres sure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a Substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pres sure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumina tion of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS mal function indicator is provided by a separate telltale which displays the symbol TPMS when illuminated When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pr
291. pull up A the switch for higher speed or push down V the switch for lower speed ge To turn the fan speed control off press the front blower OFF button OHM048110 D240206AUN Air conditioning Press the A C button to turn the air con ditioning system on indicator light will illuminate Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off OHM048108 D240208AHM EE OFF mode Press the front blower OFF button to turn off the front air climate control system However you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the igni tion switch is in the ON position Features of your vehicle E Front OHM048159 D240300AHM EE Rear heating and air conditioning if equipped To turn on the rear climate control sys tem 1 Press the rear blower ON OFF button located on the front and rear climate control panel indicator light will illumi nate Operating the fan speed switch will also turn on the rear climate control system 2 Set the fan speed to the desired speed with the front or rear fan speed switch 3 The rear temperature and mode is controlled automatically by the front climate control system e Rear temperature same as the front temperature e Rear mode control Front mode control is Rear mode control is gt Front mode control _ is Rear mode control is s Front mode controlis ss lt a Mt Rear mode control is s 4 To turn off the rear climate
292. r position Safety features of your vehicle ouno26140 A CAUTION Damaging rear seat belt buckles When you fold the rear 2nd and or 3rd row seatback insert the buckle in the pocket between the rear seat back and cushion Doing so can prevent the buckle from being dam aged by the rear seatback Safety features of your vehicle N CAUTION Rear seat belts When returning the rear 2nd and or 3rd row seatbacks to the upright position remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position Routing the seat belt web bing through the rear seat belt guides will help keep the belts from being trapped behind or under the seats Safety features of your vehicle SEAT BELTS C020100AHM Seat belt restraint system WARNING e For maximum restraint system protection the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright position Children age 12 and under must always be properly restrained in the rear seat Never allow chil dren to ride in the front passen ger seat If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat he she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back An improperly positioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder acros
293. r country Before buying any child restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets the safety standards of your country The restraint must be appropriate for your child s height and weight Check the label on the child restraint for this information Refer to Child restraint system in this section C020301AHM Larger children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap shoulder belts The lap portion should be fastened and snugged on the hips and as low as possible Check if the belt fits periodically A child s squirming could put the belt out of position Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat If a larger child over age 12 must be seat ed in the front seat the child should be securely restrained by the available lap shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch es the child s neck or face try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system Safety
294. r cana an E mene manometer 7 17 9r ENGINE OMA PSUC Ke a a 7 14 10 Power steering fluid reservoir 7 19 11 Windshield washer Nud reservo noze ae ea 7 20 The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration OHM018005N OHM018004N B030000AEN EU Seats 3 2 Seat belts 3 17 Child restraint system 3 32 Air bag advanced supplemental restraint system 3 40 Safety features of your vehicle 2a Safety features of your vehicle SEATS Front seat 1 Forward and backward Seatback angle Seat cushion height Driver s seat Lumbar support Driver s seat Seat warmer Climate control seat Drivers seat 2 3 4 5 6 7 Headrest NSN NY 2nd row seat 8 Forward and backward 9 Seatback angle and folding 0 Walk in seat 1 Headrest 2 Armrest 3 Seat warmer 1 1 1 1 3rd row seat 14 Seatback folding 15 Headrest if equipped Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle s 2 i j fi E T a 5 a F i p A OHM038002 Front seat adjustment manual C010101AHM Forward and backward To move the seat forward or backward 1 Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it 2 Slide the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place Adjust the seat before driving and make sure the seat is locked securely by
295. r eesse 1 6 Power adjustable pedals E E E E T 4 36 Instrument cluster e sessssssssssssssseeseeseeseeessssesssssesssssessssssno 4 48 Power steering floderien siea 7 19 Instrument panel his Bash Be ee 2 3 Interior features s sssssssssssssessssssesssesseseesesesesseeseees 4 115 R Interior light E E E E E 4 80 Interior OVERVIEW sss sssssssssssessessssessessssesceesosessssseseseeseeseo 2 2 Rear parking assist SYSTEM Cott 4 68 Rear seat entertainment system RSE eeeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 154 K Rearview occ reece pe otc paeenoceeearcee taiea 4 7 Recommended lubricants and capacities eese 8 4 Key positions EEE aed MAN E E E TEE SA Remote keyless 700 ce 4 10 O vseesesseseseseeeeeeeseesecsessenenesaesesasenessneneneneseesasssasensnenenenes A Road Warning seeereeeteserresseresseresseresterestereseenessenesaeneseenes 6 2 S Lighting ETE E E E E E S ET Ae Cia ee er ee ere RENEE ENEE 3 17 i a secs AOE E AE oso cada E E TT 2 Meee Smart Key eeeerrerserrereererreseeserrenresesstnessesennennestesensensesenrenes AF Special driving Conditions seeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 5 47 Maintenance SseryiGE enine rn Cr rrr ce ree rere 7 4 Starting the engine ee re ee ee re 5 9 Manual climate control SYSEOMs eeceesseeseeeseeseesseesseenseenes A 85 Steering adie Ce ne ea Enina 4 37 WR LNRS ROR EA EEE ee ere 4 39 Storage COMpartMEnt eeeererrereereererrrrrreerererereerrereeeerereee 4 112 ra TT A O a GMaiesmeniisiciiee PP Tailgate eeeeeeeeerreseeresresseresrenseseereneen
296. r lock switch 2 all vehicle doors will lock automatically NOTICE Always remove the ignition key engage the parking brake close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended Features of your vehicle e If the inner door handle of the drivers Drivers door or front passenger s door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position the button will unlock and the door will open if equipped e Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any of the front door is opened a OHM048008N Operating door locks from inside the vehicle D050201 AHM EU With the door lock button e To unlock a door push the door lock button 1 to the Unlock position The red mark 2 on the button will be visi ble To lock a door push the door lock but ton 1 to the Lock position If the door is locked properly the red mark 2 on the door lock button will not be visible To open a door pull the door handle 3 outward D050202AHM EU With central door lock switch Operate by pressing the central door lock switch Features of your vehicle e When pressing the front portion 1 of the switch all vehicle doors will lock e When pressing the rear portion 2 of the switch all vehicle doors will unlock e If the key is in the ignition switch or if the smart key is in the vehicle and any front door is opened the doors will not loc
297. r to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle OHM038022N C010306AHM Walk in seat 2nd row seat To get in or out of the 3rd row seat pull up the walk in lever on the 2nd row seat back The 2nd row seatback will fold and the seat will slide forward Move the seat to the farthest forward position After getting in or out slide the 2nd row seat to the farthest rearward position and pull the seatback firmly backward until it clicks into place Make sure that the seat is locked in place Safety features of your vehicle To fold down the rear seatback 1 Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion and insert the rear seat belt webbing in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged 2 Set the front or 2nd row seatback to the upright position and if necessary slide the front or 2nd row seat for ward 3 Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position E 2nd row seat E 2nd row seat OHM038026 4 Pull on the seatback folding lever then 5 To use the rear seat lift and pull the fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle When you return the seatback to its upright position always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback seatback backward by pulling on the folding lever Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place Make sure the seatback is locked in place 6 Return the rear seat belt to the prope
298. r washer A Wiper speed control if equipped MIST Single wipe OFF Off INT Intermittent wipe Type A Type A a D LO Low wiper speed a HI High wiper speed ON B Intermittent wipe time adjustment C Wash with brief wipes D Rear wiper washer control J Spraying washer fluid ON Intermittent wipe after some m Type B normal wipe OFF Off Ne Wash with brief wipes E lype B OHM049200K OTQ049902L OHM049203K OTQ049909L D200000AHM EE Features of your vehicle D200100AHM Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON MIST For a single wiping cycle push the lever upward and release it with the lever in the OFF position The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is pushed upward and held OFF Wiper is not in operation INT Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals Use this mode in a light rain or mist To vary the speed setting turn the speed control knob 1 LO Normal wiper speed HI Fast wiper speed x NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes or until the snow and or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation x NOTICE When you operate the wipers if your vehicle has a problem in any part of the wiper operation system the wiper may operate in the LO mode regard less of th
299. raking systems This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail With only one of the dual systems working more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle Also the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working If the brakes fail while you are driving shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do SO To check bulb operation check whether the parking brake and brake fluid warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ON position D150312AAM Type A Type B Shift pattern Ka om indicator IN IN This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift position is selected E PTAA D150301AHM EE Engine coolant temperature warning light if equipped The warning light illuminates if the tem perature of the engine coolant is above 125 2 5 C 257 4 5 F Do not continue driving with an overheat ed engine If your vehicle overheats refer to Overheating in the section 6 x NOTICE If the engine coolant temperature warn ing light illuminates it indicates over heating that may damage the engine See eee eee Features of your vehicle D150331AHM Low tire pressure telltale EU The low tire pressure telltale comes on for 3 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the ON position If
300. re the TPMS malfunction indicator or the Low Tire Pressure telltale may illuminate after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving Once the low pressure tire is re inflated to the recommended pres Sure and installed on the vehicle the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will turn off If the low pressure and TPMS mal function indicators do not turn off after about 20 minutes of continuous driving please visit an authorized KIA dealer You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire s inflation pressure Please note that a tire that is hot from being driven will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold from sitting station ary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1 mile during that 3 hour period Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pres sure A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile in that 3 hour period CAUTION Do not use any tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure sen sors In order for the system to cor rectly monitor tires for under inflation there should be a total of exactly 4 sensors fit ted to each of the four wh
301. reactivate your sub scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio you will need to contact SIRIUS Customer Care at 888 539 7474 Have your 12 digit SID Sirius Identification Number ESN Electronic Serial Number ready To retrieve the SID ESN turn on the radio press the SAT button and tune to chan nel zero Please note that the vehicle will need to be turned on in Sirius mode and have an unobstructed view of the sky in order for the radio to receive the activa tion signal 1 SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button SIRIUS Satellite Radio Press the SAT button to switch to SIR IUS Satellite Radio It cycles through the different bands as noted below SAT 1 SAT2 SAT3 SAT 1 2 Channel Selection Button e Press TRACK V or SEEK A but ton for less than 0 8 second to select previous or next channel e Press TRACK V or SEEK A but ton for 0 8 second or longer to continu ously move to previous or next chan nel if CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel up down is done through the channels within cur rent category 3 Preset Selection Button e Press 1 6 buttons less than 0 8 sec ond to play the channel saved in each button e Press 1 6 button for 0 8 second or longer to save current channel to the respective button with a beep 4 SCAN Selection Button e When the SCAN button is pressed it automatically scans the radio stations upwards e The SCAN feature steps throug
302. red roads These vehicles are not designed for challenging off road use Occasional off road use such as_ established unpaved roads and trails are OK It is always important when traveling off high way that the driver carefully reduces the speed to a level that does not exceed the safe operating speed for those condi tions In general off road conditions pro vide less traction and braking effective ness than normal road conditions The driver must be especially alert to avoid driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to either side These factors must be carefully consid ered when driving off road Keeping the vehicle in contact with the driving surface and under control in these conditions is always the driver s responsibility for the safety of him herself and his or her pas sengers CAUTION Do not select four wheel drive on flat and normal roads Four wheel driving on flat roads for a long period causes poor fuel economy and noise and it also causes tires to wear faster Four wheel driving on flat and normal roads can result in a severe binding and chattering condition when turning the steer ing wheel Four wheel driving on flat roads for a long period can also cause the differential oil temperature to increase resulting in damage to parts in the power train E170201AHM Tight corner brake effect CAUTION 4WD When turning sharply on a paved road at low speed while in four wheel drive 4L mode for full
303. res on some models to provide superior perform ance on dry roads Summer tire per formance is substantially reduced in snow and ice Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M S Mud and Snow on the tire side wall if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions KIA recom mends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels Snow tires If you equip your car with snow tires they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the Original tires Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels other wise poor handling may result Snow tires should carry 28 kPa 4 psi more air pressure than the pres sure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver s side of the center pillar or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever is less Do not drive faster than 120 km h 75 mph when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires Maintenance ee Radial ply tires Radial ply tires provide improved tread life road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride The radi al ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle Radial ply tires have the same load carrying capacity as bias ply or bias belted tires of the same size and use the same recommended inflation pressure Mixing of radial ply tires with bias ply or bias belted tires is
304. rgent additives which help pre vent deposit formation in the engine These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System A020107AUN Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country be sure to e Observe all regulations regarding reg istration and insurance e Determine that acceptable fuel is avail able Introduction TT VEHICLE HANDLING INSTRUCTIONS A090000AEN As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control an accident or vehicle rollover Specific design characteristics higher ground clearance track etc give this vehicle a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles In other words they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2 wheel drive vehicles Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Again failure to oper ate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control an accident or vehicle rollover Be sure to read the Reducing the risk of a rollover driving guide lines in section 5 of this manual VEHICLE BREAK IN PROCESS A030000AUN No special break in period is needed By following a few simple precautions for the first 1 000 miles 600 km you may add to the performance economy and life of your vehicle e Do not race the engine e While driving keep your engine speed rom or revolutions per mi
305. rive the vehicle until you can reach a safe loca tion or repair shop W 75 See Saeed Driving your vehicle E070300AHM EC Anti lock brake system ABS The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels If the wheels are going to lock the ABS system repeatedly modu lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels When you apply your brakes under con ditions which may lock the wheels you may hear a tik tik sound from the brakes or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal This is normal and it means your ABS is active In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situa tion do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situa tion allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes Driving your vehicle x NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehicle begins to move after the engine is start ed These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti lock brake system is functioning properly e Even with the anti lock brake system your vehicle still requires sufficient stopping distance Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you e Always slow down when cornering The anti lock brake system cannot pre vent accidents resulting from exces sive speeds e On loose or uneven road surfaces operation
306. rly If the AIR BAG warning light does not come on or con tinuously remains on after operating for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition switch to the ON position or start ed the engine or if it comes on while driving have the SRS inspected by an authorized KIA dealer D150303AHM EE Anti lock brake system ABS warning light This light illuminates if the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off in approxi mately 3 seconds if the system is operat ing normally If the ABS warning light remains on comes on while driving or does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position this indicates that the ABS may have malfunctioned If this occurs have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible The normal braking system will Still be operational but without the assis tance of the anti lock brake system Features of your vehicle Electronic brake force distribution EBD system warning light w If these two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving the ABS and EBD system may have malfunctioned In this case your ABS and regular brake system may not work normally Have the vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible NOTICE If the ABS warning light or EBD warn ing light is on and stays on the speedometer or odometer tripmeter may not work In this case have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer as soon as p
307. rmal system operation characteristic Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling however continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale During cooling operation you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake This is a normal system opera tion characteristic Features of your vehicle Outside air O Lnn ET Blower Climate control air filter Heater core Evaporator core OHM048209 D230300BHM EC Climate control air filter if equipped The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehi cle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time the air flow from the air vents may decrease resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside fresh air position is selected If this hap pens have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized KIA dealer x NOTICE e Replace the filter according to the maintenance schedule If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required e When the air flow rate suddenly decreases the system should be checked
308. rn off the defroster press the rear window defroster button again D220101AEN Outside rearview mirror defroster if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the out side rearview mirror defrosters they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster OHM048087 D220200AHM Front wiper deicer if equipped The engine must be running to enable this feature To activate the front wiper deicer press the front wiper deicer but ton The indicator on the button illumi nates when the deicer is ON Features of your vehicle MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED E Type A Front climate control Fan speed control switch Recirculated air position button Air conditioning button Mode selection knob Front wiper deicer button Rear window defroster button Rear fan speed control switch controlled from the front 8 Front blower ON OFF button 9 Temperature control button e Rear climate control 10 Rear blower ON OFF button controlled from the front 11 Rear temperature control switch 12 Rear mode selection button 13 Rear blower ON OFF button 14 Rear fan speed control switch if equipped NO of WD gt 10 Oe OHM049088L OHM048101 D230000AHM Features of your vehicle E Type B Fan speed control switch Front blower ON OFF button Mode selection knob Air conditioning button Temperature control switch Air intake control button
309. roduct make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and soft cloth Never use harsh materials chemical cloths or sol vents alcohol benzene thinners etc as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color and quality deterioration This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation Features of your vehicle Dolby Digital Dolby DIGITAL Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DTS 2 0 S dts 2 0 Channel Manufactured under license from one or more of the following DTS DTS Inc U S Pat No s 5 451 942 5 956 674 5 974 380 5 978 762 6 226 616 6 487 535 and other U S and Noti world wide patents issued and pending DTS and DTS ouce Digital Surround are registered trademarks of DTS Inc Copyright 1996 2002 2006 DTS Inc All Rights Reserved DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems Inc Notice DVD Video Player DVD FLLC Logo i A U S Patent Nos 4 631 603 4 577 216 4 819 098 4 907 093 and 6 516 132 This product incorporates copyright protection technology that Macrovision Notice is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property ri
310. s to store an additional loca tion for this contact OONDOOA WD e Adding Entry by phone 1 Press the button 2 Say phonebook 3 Say add entry 4 Say by phone 5 Say yes 6 Transfer procedures may vary depend ing on the cellular phone x NOTICE The system can recognize single digits from zero to nine Numbers that are ten or greater are not recognized To speed up input it is a good idea to group all digits into a continuous string However you can enter each digit indi vidually or group digits together in pre ferred string lengths The display corresponding to each oper ation appears on the screen as follows Input operation 1 say Nine nine five Display 995 2 say Seven three four Display 995734 e Changing Name The registered names can be changed 1 Press the button 2 Say phonebook 3 Say Change name 4 Say the name of the phonebook voice tag 5 Say yes 6 Say the name of the phonebook to be changed Features of your vehicle Deleting name m Making a phone call e Dialing by Number The registered names can be deleted e Calling by Name The system will make a phone call by The system dials the numbers corre dialing the spoken numbers 1 Press the button sponding to the spoken names regis The system can recognize single digits 2 Say phonebook tered in the system from zero to nine 3 Say Delete name 4 Say the name of the contact
311. s and the chime sounds continuously to indicate that you could start the engine by pressing the ENGINE START STOP button once more The chime will stop if the ENGINE START STOP button system works nor mally or the theft alarm system is armed If the warning illuminates each time you press the ENGINE START STOP button take your vehicle to an authorized KIA dealer and have the system checked Shift to P or N to start the engine If you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P Park or N Neutral position the warning illuminates for about 10 seconds on the LCD display You can also start the engine with the shift lever in the N Neutral position but for your safety start the engine with the shift lever in the P Park position Press button while turn steering If the steering wheel does not unlock nor mally when the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed the warning illumi nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display Also the warning chime sounds once and the ENGINE START STOP button light blinks for 10 seconds When you are warned press the ENGINE START STOP button while turn ing the steering wheel right and left Check steering wheel lock If the steering wheel does not lock nor mally when the ENGINE START STOP button changes to the OFF position the warning illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD display Also the warning chime sounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINE START STOP button light blinks for 10 secon
312. s comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle With the immobilizer system whenever you insert your ignition key into the igni tion switch and turn it to ON it checks and determines and verifies that the igni tion key is valid If the key is determined to be valid the engine will start If the key is determined to be invalid the engine will not start Features of your vehicle This device complies with Industry Canada standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful x NOTICE If you need additional keys or lose your keys consult an authorized KIA dealer A CAUTION Do not change alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer sys A CAUTION The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system It is designed to give years of trouble free service however you should avoid expo tem to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized KIA dealer Malfunctions caused by improper alterations adjustments or modifi cations to the immobilizer system interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation are not covered by your vehicle sure to moisture static electricity manufacturer warranty and rough handling Immobilizer system malfunct
313. s may be burned out and will require replacement One touch lane change function To activate an one touch lane change function move the turn signal lever slightly for less than 0 5 second and then release it The lane change signals will blink 3 times x NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit Seale ve eevee Features of your vehicle OHM048071N D190700AHM EU Front fog light if equipped Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility when visibility is poor due to fog rain or snow etc The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch 1 is turned on after the headlight low beam is turned on To turn off the fog lights turn the fog light switch 1 to the OFF position A CAUTION When in operation the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor D190900AUN EU Daytime running light Daytime Running Lights DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be help ful in many different driving conditions and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset The DRL system will make the head lights turn OFF when 1 The headlight switch is ON 2 The parking brake is applied 3 Engine stops Features of your vehicle WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield wiper washer Rear window wipe
314. s regarding your vehicle We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle KIA offers a great variety of options components and features for its various models Therefore some of the equipment described in this manual along with the various illustrations may not be applicable to your particular vehicle The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing KIA reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation If you have questions always check with your KIA dealer We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your KIA vehicle 2009 Kia Canada Inc All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia Canada Inc Printed in Korea 1 oa 7 7 TABLE OF CONTENTS Sl om Specifications amp Consumer information 8 ee ee ee ee ee eee ga sss esses Introduction How to use this manual 1 2 Fuel requirements 1 3 Vehicle handling instructions 1 5 Vehicle break in process 1 5 Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster 1 6 Introduction On
315. s tire could result in tire failure loss of vehicle control and possible per sonal injury Do not exceed the vehicle s maxi mum load rating or the load carry ing capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire Avoid driving over obstacles The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a con ventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 25 mm 1 inch which could result in damage to the vehicle Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com pact spare tire is installed The compact spare tire s tread life is shorter than a regular tire Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com pact spare tires with the same size and design mounted on the same wheel The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels nor should standard tires snow tires wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel If such use is attempted damage to these items or other car compo nents may occur Do not use more than one compact Spare tire at a time Do not tow a trailer while the com pact spare tire is installed What to do in an emergency TOWING pa dolly 2WD or part time 4WD 2H position vehicles only OHM068016 F080100AHM EU Towing service If emergency towing is necessary we recommend having it done by an author ized KIA dealer or a commercial tow truck service Proper lifting and towing
316. s your collarbone Continued Continued Avoid wearing twisted seat belts A twisted belt can t do its job well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twist ed Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware If the belt webbing or hardware is dam aged replace it 4 WARNING Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders as applicable wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible consistent with comfort to provide the protection for which they have been designed A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer Continued Continued Care should be taken to avoid con tamination of the webbing with pol ishes oils and chemicals and par ticularly battery acid Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed contaminated or damaged It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious Belts should not be worn with straps twisted Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant it is dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occu pant s lap 44 WARNING N
317. sed OUN036002 Ignition switch position E030201AUN LOCK The steering wheel locks to protect against theft The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position E030202AHM ACC Accessory The steering wheel is unlocked and elec trical accessories are operative x NOTICE If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension E030203AUN ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started This is the normal running position after the engine is started Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge Driving your vehicle E030204AUN START Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine The engine will crank until you release the key then it returns to the ON position The brake warning lamp can be checked in this position E030205AHM Se ee Driving your vehicle ENGINE START STOP BUTTON IF EQUIPPED llluminated ENGINE START STOP button E030100AHM Whenever the front door is opened the ENGINE START STOP button will illumi nate for your convenience The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed It will also go off immedi ately when the
318. senterensenserenrenseneereneens 4 19 ie Index C O Theft alarm system aus aa sata ora A bia saya his a A TT 4 13 Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS s ee 6 7 Tire specification and pressure label sseeeeeee 8 7 Tires and wheels EE E aie ovata es ya e tase arayaiels sha etmsevetevaievereiais aieieis eialer a aie 7 28 3 Towing aaa oie ataiayalare e cues a e a are erausie ateie o E E E sieve eje e 0 0 ete elaisrere gale E siacare 6 20 Trailer towing nee nose va 0 10 ove 6 0 ereve yaieitere Wie rere ererele E TE 5 54 Vehicle break in process E T E E E E E a cle T S E ae ares 1 5 Vehicle certification label daiwa A o1are e e TE aise T a T 8 6 Vehicle handling instructions avai Wraica wierananaie eianaua wieiane esst ui ieit idinadaos 1 5 Vehicle identification number VIN ererereeeeereerreeeeeeee 8 6 Vehicle load limit ssbb alae sieve a wlaysie cous a s E E T 5 63 Vehicle weight a T a N a averse saree Slave wees 5 68 W Washer fluid E A A A E E A A sess A A cece 7 20 Windows A EE E a a EET 4 21 Windshield defrosting and defogging eseese 4 109 Winter driving E L E bikie eb siete oie T TE 5 51 Wiper blades P E E E E E E E a aide c eieiGusnsrase E s 4yelercio J22 Wipers and washers raves aie 60 0ayn ierssali E e avers es ata E A A TT 4 71 as Or
319. shut off the vehicle 4 Place chocks under the trailer wheels on the down hill side of the wheels brake set Driving your vehicle When you are ready to leave after park ing on a hill 1 With the automatic transmission in P Park apply your brakes and hold the brake pedal down while you e Start your engine e Shift into gear and e Release the parking brake 2 Slowly remove your foot from the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks E140500AHM Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you regularly pull a trailer Important items to pay particular atten tion to include engine oil automatic transmission fluid axle lubricant and cooling system fluid Brake condition is another important item to frequently check Each item is covered in this man ual and the index will help you find them quickly If you re trailering it s a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Don t forget to also maintain your trailer and hitch Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and check it periodically Preferably con duct the check at the start of each day s driving Most importantly all hitch nuts and bolts should be tight CAUTION Due to higher load during trailer usage overheating might occur in hot days or during uphill driv ing If the coolant gauge
320. so sound for about 5 seconds The indicator will go off while the vehicle is moving Keep the smart key in the vehicle or insert it in the smart key holder D150326AHM EE Lights on warning chime if equipped The lights on warning chime will sound if the driver s door is opened when the headlight switch is left in the 1st or 2nd position with the ignition switch removed for smart key in OFF position See eee eee Features of your vehicle D150400AHM LCD display warning if equipped Key is not in vehicle If the smart key is not in the vehicle and if any door is opened or closed with the ENGINE START STOP button in the ACC ON or START position the warn ing illuminates on the LCD display Also the chime sounds for 5 seconds when the smart key is not in the vehicle and the door is closed Always have the smart key with you Key is not detected If the smart key is not in the vehicle or is not detected and you press the ENGINE START STOP button the warning illumi nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds Also the immobilizer indicator and the key holder light blinks for 10 seconds Low key battery If the ENGINE START STOP button changes to the OFF position when the smart key in the vehicle discharges the warning illuminates on the LCD display for about 10 seconds Also the warning chime sounds once Replace the battery with a new one Press brake pedal to start engine If the ENGINE START STOP button ch
321. song in the CD Features of your vehicle 10 Track File Search Knob and ENTER Button e Turn this knob clockwise to display the Track NO File name after the current song Turn this button counterclockwise to display the Track NO File Name before the current song To select the displayed song press the button 11 FOLDER Search Button e Folder name File name the first song in the folder is moved up or down from the currently playing folder e To select the displayed folder press ENTER NO 10 button 12 INFORMATION Button Displays the information of the current CD TRACK FILE as below when the button is pressed each time e CDDA DISC TITLE DISC ARTIST TRACK TITLE TRACK ARTIST TOTAL TRACK e MP3 WMA FILE NAMEs TITLE ARTIST ALBUM FOLDER NAME TOTAL FILE 13 DISC UP DOWN Button CDC ONLY Disc is moved up or down from the cur rently playing disc 14 CD Loading Button CDC ONLY How to load a CD Press LOAD for less than 0 8 second An empty slot is selected and the CD number indicator a blinks on the LCD After WAIT is displayed for a moment INSERT DISC 1 6 is diplayed and the CD slot indicator b blinks Insert a CD while the slot indicator blinks How to load CDs ALL Load e Press LOAD for more than 0 8 sec ond An empty slot is selected and the CD number indicator a blinks on the LCD After WAIT is displayed for a moment INSERT DISC 1 6 is diplayed and
322. st so that it properly supports the head and neck j gt Adjusting the height up and down To raise the headrest pull it up to the desired position 1 To lower the head rest push and hold the release button 2 on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position 3 Safety features of your vehicle Removal To remove the headrest raise it as far as it can go then press the release button 1 while pulling the headrest up 2 To reinstall the headrest put the head rest poles 3 into the holes while press ing the release button 1 Then adjust it to the appropriate height HNF2041 1 Active headrest if equipped The active headrest is designed to move forward and upward during a rear impact This helps to prevent the driver s and front passengers heads from moving backward and thus helps minimize neck injuries OHM038008 C010105AHM Lumbar support for driver s seat The lumbar support can be adjusted by moving the lever Pivoting the lever increases or decreases lumbar support See ae Seated Safety features of your vehicle The seat warmers are provided to warm the front seats during cold weather With the ignition switch in the ON position driver s seat or the front passenger s where the operation of the seat warmer The temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows SLO cener ht NOTICE With the seat warmer switch in the ON position
323. stems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by a LATCH system if equipped Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured For small children and babies a child seat or infant seat must be used Before buying a particular child restraint system make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts and fits your child Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle For safety reasons we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency condi tions emergency lock mode you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint C030100AHM EU Using a child restraint system For small children and babies the use of a child seat or infant seat is required This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the man ufacturer s instructions Safety features of your vehicle E2MS103005 C030102AAM EU Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehi cle fro
324. t fuel consumption every 2 seconds Type B every 0 2 second from the driving dis tance and quantity of fuel injection ECO Driving OFF Driving ON OHM049230 ECO ON OFF mode if equipped You can turn the ECO indicator on off on the instrument cluster in this mode If you press the RESET button more than 1 second in the ECO ON mode ECO OFF is displayed and the ECO indicator turns off If you want to display the ECO indicator again press the RESET button more than 1 second in the ECO OFF mode and then ECO ON mode is displayed in the LCD display Features of your vehicle X NOTICE If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been interrupt ed the Distance to empty function may not operate correctly The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters 1 6 gallons of fuel are added to the vehi cle The fuel consumption and distance to empty values may vary significantly based on driving conditions driving habits and condition of the vehicle The distance to empty value is an esti mate of the available driving distance This value may differ from the actual driving distance available D150300AUN Warnings and indicators All warning lights are checked by turning the ignition switch ON do not start the engine Any light that does not illuminate should be checked by an authorized KIA dealer After starting the engine check to make sure that all warning
325. t passenger seat This can adversely affect the occupant detection system Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools when occupying the front passenger seat This can adversely affect the occupant detection system Do not use accessory seat cov ers on the front seats Accident statistics show that chil dren are safer if they are restrained in the rear as opposed to the front seat It is recommend ed that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a forward facing child seat and an older child rid ing in a booster seat Continued have an authorized KIA dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment A smaller stature adult who is not seated correctly for example seat excessively reclined leaning on the door or center console or hips shifted forward in the seat can cause a condition where the advanced frontal air bag system senses less weight than if the occupant were seated properly sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor This condition can result in an adult potentially being misclassi fied and illumination of the PAS SENGER AIR BAG OFF indica tor Safety features of your vehicle Driver s front air bag pus The indications of the system s presence f gt are the letters SRS AIR BAG
326. t your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the over head console The sunroof can only be opened closed or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position NOTICE The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position Features of your vehicle D110100AHM Sliding the sunroof To open or close the sunroof manual Slide feature pull or push the sunroof control lever backward or forward to the first detent position Pulling the control lever downward also closes the sunroof OHM048025 To open the sunroof automatically Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position and then release it The sunroof will slide open automatically but will not open all the way If you would like to completely open the sunroof pull the lever once more However the second time the lever is pulled the sunroof will open only while the lever is pulled To stop the sunroof sliding at any point pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily To close the sunroof automatically Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position and then release it The sunroof will automatically close all the way To stop the sunroof sliding at any point pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily OHM048026 D110101AEN Automatic reversal If an object or part of the body is detect ed while the sunroof is
327. te with excessive strength The tailgate will close and lock automatically if it is pulled down to the first detent The tailgate may not close and lock automatically even though the tailgate was lowered down to the first detent if you close and open the tailgate repeat edly several times If this happens close the tailgate manually and wait for about 10 seconds to operate nor mally J CAUTION Make sure nothing is near the tail gate latch and striker while closing the tailgate It may damage the tail gate s power latch Sea ace facia Features of your vehicle OHM048014 D070300AHM Emergency tailgate safety release Your vehicle is equipped with the emer gency tailgate safety release lever locat ed on the bottom of the tailgate When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the tailgate Features of your vehicle WINDOWS DO80000AHM EE 1 Driver s door power window switch 2 Front passengers door power win dow switch 3 Rear door left power window switch 4 Rear door right power window switch 5 Window opening and closing 6 Automatic power window up down Driver s window 7 Power window lock switch if equipped x NOTICE In cold and wet climates power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions N OHM048017N See ee cece al Features of your ve
328. te in side impact collisions because occupants move to the direction of the collision and thus in side impacts frontal air bag deployment would not provide addi tional occupant protection However if equipped with side impact and curtain air bags the air bags may inflate depending on the intensity vehi cle speed and angles of impact 1VQA2089 e In an angled collision the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional bene fit and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags afety features of your vehicle 1VQA2090 e Just before impact drivers often brake heavily Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to ride under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance Air bags may not inflate in this under ride situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be signifi cantly reduced by such under ride collisions 1VQA2091 e Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection However if equipped with side impact and curtain air bags the air bags may inflate in a rollover when it is detected by the rollover sensor e Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle J 1VQA2092 collides with objects such as utility poles or trees where the point of impact is concentrated
329. tem on The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illu minate 2 Accelerate to the desired speed which must be more than 40 km h 25 mph the desired speed The SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi nate Release the accelerator at the same time The desired speed will auto matically be maintained Driving your vehicle e Push the RES switch and release it immediately The cruising speed will increase by 1 6 km h 1 0 mph each time the RES switch is operated in this manner Type B e Move the lever up to RES and hold it Your vehicle will accelerate Release the lever at the speed you want e Move the lever up to RES and release it immediately The cruising speed will increase by 1 6 km h 1 0 mph each time the lever is operated in this manner OHM059044 OHM059046 E090200BHM EU E090300BHM EU To increase cruise control set To decrease the cruising speed speed Follow either of these procedures Follow either of these procedures Type A Type A e Push the SET switch and hold it Your e Push the RES switch and hold it Your vehicle will gradually slow down vehicle will accelerate Release the Release the switch at the speed you switch at the speed you want want to maintain Driving your vehicle e Push the SET switch and release it immediately The cruising speed will decrease by 1 6 km h 1 0 mph each time the SET switch is operated in this manner T
330. tempt to restart the engine A CAUTION Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds If the engine stalls or fails to start wait 5 to 10 seconds before re engaging the starter Improper use of the starter may damage it eS Saeed Driving your vehicle OHM058033 E040300AHM EU Starting the engine with a smart key if equipped 1 Carry the smart key or leave it inside the vehicle 2 Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied 3 Place the transmission shift lever in P Park 4 Press the ENGINE START STOP but ton while depressing the brake pedal 5 In extremely cold weather below 18 C 0 F or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator Whether the engine is cold or warm it should be started without depressing the e Even if the smart key is in the vehicle if it is far away from you the engine may not start When the ENGINE START STOP but ton is in the ACC position or above if any door is opened the system checks for the smart key If the smart key is not in the vehicle the KEY OUT indicator will blink or the warning Key is not in vehicle will illuminate on the LCD dis play And if all doors are closed the chime will sound for 5 seconds The indicator or warning will turn off while the vehicle is moving Always have the smart key with you CAUTION If the engine stalls while the
331. the P Park position NOTICE If you press the ENGINE START STOP button without depressing the brake pedal the engine will not start and the button will change as follow in OFF gt ACC gt ON gt OFF or ACC order See ace aca Driving your vehicle E030205AHM NOTICE If you leave the ENGINE START STOP button in the ACC or ON position for a long time the battery will discharge Driving your vehicle STARTING THE ENGINE E040000AUN EU Starting the engine with an igni tion key if equipped E040100AHM 1 Make sure the parking brake is applied 2 Place the transmission shift lever in P Park Depress the brake pedal fully You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N Neutral position 3 Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts a maximum of 10 seconds then release the key 4 In extremely cold weather below 18 C 0 F or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days let the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator Whether the engine is cold or warm it should be started without depressing the accelerator A CAUTION If the engine stalls while you are in motion do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P Park position If traffic and road conditions permit you may put the shift lever in the N Neutral position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an at
332. the air flow is changed as follows sile Ne SN I NI J CAUTION When cleaning the seats do not use an organic solvent such as thinner benzene alcohol and gasoline Doing so may damage the surface of the seats Do not spill liquid such as water or beverages on the surface of the front seats and seatbacks or the air vent holes may be blocked and prevented from working properly Do not place materials such as plastic bags or newspapers under the seats The air vent may not work properly as the air intake can be blocked When the air vent does not oper ate restart the vehicle If there is no change have your vehicle inspected by an authorized KIA dealer See ee eee od Safety features of your vehicle C010108AHM Seatback pocket OXM039015 C010200AHM Front seat adjustment power if equipped The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the out side of the seat cushion Before driving adjust the seat to the proper position so as to easily control the steering wheel pedals and switches on the instrument panel Safety features of your vehicle J CAUTION e The power seat is driven by an electric motor Stop operating once the adjustment is complet ed Excessive operation may damage the electrical equipment When in operation the power seat consumes a large amount of electrical power To prevent unnecessary charging system drain don t adjust
333. the brakes to slow down then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed Don t ride the brake pedal Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driv ing can be dangerous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effectiveness It also increases the wear of the brake components If a tire goes flat while you are driving apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so pull off the road and stop in a safe place e If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission don t let your vehicle creep forward To avoid creep ing forward keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped Be cautious when parking on a hill Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P Park If your vehicle is facing downhill turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling If your vehicle is facing uphill turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling block the wheels Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged posi tion This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet If there is a risk that the p
334. the corresponding button manu ally If the Y position is selected lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed OCOODODOODL Features of your vehicle GP CPSS SPP rede RSS HeSsaa ee OHM048120L D250102AEN To defrost outside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the highest posi tion 2 Set the temperature to the extreme hot position 3 Select the Y position 4 The outside fresh air and air condi tioning will be selected automatically If the 47 position is selected lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed OHM048121 Automatic climate control system D250201AHM To defog inside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the desired posi tion 2 Select desired temperature 3 Press the defroster button WY 4 The air conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient tem perature and outside fresh air posi tion will be selected automatically If the air conditioning and outside fresh air position are not selected automatical ly adjust the corresponding button man ually If the 4 position is selected lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed OHM0481 22 D250202AHM To defrost outside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the highest posi tion 2 Set the temperature to the extreme hot HI position 3 Press the defroster button W 4 The air conditioning will turn on according to the detected ambient temperature and outside fresh
335. the engine with a smart key in section 5 DO040300AHM EC Smart key precautions Xx NOTICE e If for some reason you happen to lose your smart key you will not be able to start the engine Tow the vehicle if necessary and contact an authorized KIA dealer e A maximum of 2 smart keys can be registered to a single vehicle If you lose a smart key you should immedi ately take the vehicle and Key to your authorized KIA dealer to protect it from potential theft e The smart key will not work if any of the following occurs The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the smart Key The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone Another vehicle s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle When the smart key does not work properly open and close the door with the mechanical key If you have a problem with the smart key contact an authorized KIA dealer CAUTION Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids it will not be covered by your manufactur er s vehicle warranty This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received
336. the equalizer of iPod When the iPod cable is connect ed the system can be switched to the AUX mode even without the iPod device and can cause noise Disconnect iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device When the iPod is not used with the audio system iPod cable has to be separated from iPod device Origin display of iPod may not be displayed iPod to AUDIO Buttons It is displayed once at the beginning of iPod mode FILE DOWN ROTATE ENCODER Features of your vehicle RSE DVD AUX2 1 DVDP TRACK UP DOWN Button 2 DVDP TITLE UP DOWN Button 3 RSE ON OFF RSE LOCK UNLOCK Button 4 AUX2 DVD Selection Button CD AUX 4 A 350HMU Features of your vehicle Using the Rear Seat Entertainment RSE 1 DVD Chapter Selection Button e Press TRACK V button to play from the beginning of current track e Press TRACK V button again within 3 seconds to play the previous track e Press SEEK button for less than 0 8 second to play the next track 2 DVD Title Selection Button e Press FOLDER V button to play the previous track e Press CAT button to play the next track 3 RSE ON OFF LOCK UNLOCK Button When the RSE ON OFF LOCK UNLOCK button is pushed for less than 0 8 sec ond the red color LED of the button will light and RSE unit will be locked If you push button for more than 0 8 second the green color LED of the button will light and RSE unit will turn on and RS
337. the info display window the ON state ENTER button will change to the MENU button Select the MENU but ton 3 After the menu screen is displayed select the desired number between the O 9 and press the DONE button to complete Features of your vehicle DVD mode Starting DVD mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display the MODE selection screen 2 If the key on the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode 3 While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the select area to DVDP mode If the joystick key is pressed the DVD already inserted in the DVD PLAYER will begin playing 4 The DVD title will begin playing 4 X A r PR ee a wi nc ADA chi 70S 2 15 38 NOTICE Understanding DVD titles Contents of DVD Title The video and sound recorded on the DVD are divided into titles and can be recognized by their title numbers Each title is sub divided into smaller units called chapters and each chapter can be recognized by the chapter number The title number and chapter number of the current DVD title is displayed on the upper side of the DVD operation menu screen DVD region code The DVD player and DVD discs are set with region codes and can be played in accordance to the sales region If a disc
338. the lock position the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled 3 Close the rear door To open the rear door pull the outside door handle 1 Even though the doors may be unlocked the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle 2 until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked ia Features of your vehicle TAILGATE DO70200BHM Closing the tailgate To close the tailgate lower and push down the tailgate to the first detent Then x NOTICE In cold and wet climates door lock and door mechanisms may not work proper ly due to freezing conditions DO70100AHM EE Opening the tailgate e The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the key transmitter or smart key or central door lock switch Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail gate unlock button on the transmitter or smart key is pressed Once the tailgate is opened and then closed the tailgate is locked automatically If unlocked the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle switch and then pulling the handle up CAUTION Make certain that you close the tail gate before driving your vehicle Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving it will close and lock automatically Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched x NOTICE e You do not have to close the tailga
339. the power seat longer than necessary while the OHM038011L OHM038012L engine Is not running C010201AHM C010202AHM e Do not operate two or more power Forward and backward Seatback angle seat control switches atthe same Push the control switch forward or back Push the control switch forward or back time Doing so may result in ward to move the seat to the desired ward to move the seatback to the desired power seat motor or electrical Position Release the switch once the angle Release the switch once the seat component malfunction seat reaches the desired position reaches the desired position See ee ee ol Safety features of your vehicle OHM038013L C010203AHM Seat cushion height for driver s seat Pull the front portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the rear part of the seat cushion Release the switch once the seat reach es the desired position OHM038014 C010204AHM Lumbar support for driver s seat if equipped The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the button OHM038015N Rear seat adjustment C010301AHM Forward and backward 2nd row seat To move the seat forward or backward 1 Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it 2 Slide the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place Safety
340. the switch for cooler air C OHM048118 D240303AHM Rear fan speed control To change the fan speed pull up A the switch for higher speed or push down V the switch for lower speed To turn the fan speed control off press the rear blower ON OFF button indica tor light is not illuminated D240500AHM For information on Climate control air filter etc refer to Manual climate control system in this section Features of your vehicle WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING D250000AHM e For maximum defrosting set the tem perature control to the extreme right not position and the fan speed control to the highest speed e If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging set the mode to the floor defrost position e Before driving clear all snow and ice from the windshield rear window out side rear view mirrors and all side win dows e Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve OHM048119L heater and defroster efficiency and to Manual climate control system reduce the probability of fogging up the D250101AEN ai To defog inside windshield 1 Set the fan speed to the desired posi tion 2 Select desired temperature 3 Select the or WY position 4 The outside fresh air and air condi tioning will be selected automatically If the air conditioning and outside fresh air position are not selected automatical ly press
341. ting a station through Preset This function allows station previously saved to be selected for broadcast 1 After selecting one of the SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIRIUS3 modes move the select area to the preset button stored with the broadcast station desired for listening and press ENTER SIRIUSH 1 O21 THE SPECTRUM JAZZ amp POP THE CARPAL TUNNEL OF LOVE gt SATa NOTICE The stations possible for preset are 6 channels each for SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 and SIRIUS3 Selecting a station through Channel search 1 After selecting one of the SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIRIUS3 modes press the Channel Search button on the Remote Control to increase or decrease the station in 1 step increments Use the Channel Search button to select the station desired for broadcast 2 Press the SEEK UP DOWN button on the Remote Control to automatical ly increase or decrease the station Storing a broadcast channel to a Preset button Storing Manually 1 To store the current station use the 4 direction key on the REAR panel or the Remote Control to display the cursor and move it to the PRESET button desired for storing 2 After positioning the cursor to the PRESET button desired for storing press the JOYSTICK select key on the REAR panel or the select key on the Remote Control for over 0 8 seconds to store the current frequency SIRIUS 1 Wr 2a O21 THE SPECTRUM JAZZ amp POP ENT THE CARPAL TUNNEL OF LOVE Feat
342. tion switch is in the ON position before starting the engine have the system checked by an authorized KIA dealer With smart key system If any of the following occurs in a vehicle equipped with the smart key the immobi lizer indicator illuminates blinks or goes off e When the smart key is in the vehicle if the ENGINE START STOP button is in the ACC or ON position the indicator will illuminate for a few minutes to indi cate that you are able to start the engine However when the smart key is not in the vehicle if the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed the indicator will blink for a few minutes to indicate that you are not be able to start the engine e When the ENGINE START STOP but ton is changed to the ON position from the ACC position without the smart key in the vehicle the indicator light blinks for a few minutes to indicate that you are not be able to start the engine e When the battery is weak if the ENGINE START STOP button is pressed the indicator will blink and you are not able to start the engine However you are able to start the engine by inserting the smart key in the smart key holder If the smart key system related parts have a problem the indicator will blink D150318AHM Low fuel level warning light mi This warning light indicates the fuel tank is nearly empty When it comes on you should add fuel as soon as possible Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level bel
343. tion will be selected automatically To improve the effectiveness of cooling a small amount of air is directed to the floor Face Level B C D E F Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face Additionally each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet Bi Level B D E C F Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor Floor Level C A D E Most of the air flow is directed to the floor with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side win dow defrosters j Floor Defrost Level A C D E Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters Defrost Level A D Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters Features of your vehicle ar Sia a Prajan PeT ii T OHM048092N Instrument panel vents The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumbwheel Also you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown E Type A OHM048093L D230102AHM EC Temperature control The temperature control switch allows you to control the temperature of the air flow from the ventilation system To change the air temperature in the pas senger compartment Type A Press the right side button P for warm and hot air H
344. tly selected channel if CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen channel changing Is done through the channels within cur rent category 5 Tune Knob and Enter Button e Rotate clockwise to increase the chan nel number or to scroll down the cate gory list e Rotate counterclockwise to decrease the channel number or to scroll up the category list e Press this button to make selection of channels or items Features of your vehicle 6 CAT FOLDER Button Press CAT A or FOLDER V but ton to enter the Category List Mode The display will indicate the category items highlight the category that the current channel belongs to In the Category List Mode press these buttons to navigate category list Press ENTER Button to select the lowest channel in highlighted category If channel is selected by selecting cat egory CATEGORY Icon is displayed at the top of the screen 7 INFO Selection Button Displays the information of the current channel as below when the button is pressed each time When default display is CAT CH Category Channel Artist Title Composer if available Category Channel When default display is ART TITLE Artist Titles Category Channel Composer if available Artist Titles Troubleshooting 1 Antenna Error If this message is displayed the anten na or antenna cable is broken or unplugged Please consult with your Kia dealership 2 Acquiring Signal
345. to the programmed status If the battery has been discharged or disconnected it resets to the defog logic status See ace Gece Features of your vehicle STORAGE COMPARTMENT D270000AHM These compartments can be used to store small items CAUTION e To avoid possible theft do not leave valuables in the storage compartment Always keep the storage com partment covers closed while driving Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage D270100AHM D270200AEN pe saa BONE CEILS GENS Center console storage Glove box if equipped The glove box can be locked and To open the center console storage push unlocked with a master key the button 1 or pull up the lever 2 To open the glove box pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open Close the glove box after use Features of your vehicle TE opah T n u OHM048127 D270300AHM Sunglass holder To open the sunglass holder press the cover and the holder will slowly open Place your sunglasses in the compart ment door with the lenses facing out Push to close OHM048226N D270400AHM Multi box To open the cover press the button and the cover will slowly open E E Features of your vehicle D270500AHM Luggage box You can place a first aid kit a reflector tri angle tools etc in the box for easy access Grasp the handle on the edge of the cover
346. to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between them selves and the air bags Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates Keep occupants away from the air bag covers All occupants should sit upright fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor If occupants are too close to the air bag covers they could be injured if the air bags inflate Do not attach or place objects on or near the air bag covers Any object attached to or placed on the front or side air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags Do not modify the front seats Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the sup plemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags Do not place items under the front seats Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring har nesses Never hold an infant or child on your lap The infant or child could be seri ously injured or killed in the event of a crash All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat C041400AUN Adding equipment
347. to one area and the full force of the impact is not deliv ered to the sensors Safety features of your vehicle C041100AHM EU SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate or con tinuously remains on have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized KIA dealer Any work on the SRS system such as removing installing repairing or any work on the steering wheel drivers knee bolster the front passenger s panel front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized KIA dealer Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury Safety features of your vehicle C041300AUN Additional safety precautions Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a folded down back seat All occupants should sit upright fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving A passenger who is not wear ing a seat belt during a crash or emer gency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle against other occupants or out of the vehicle Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant If more than one person uses the same seat belt they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision Do not use any accessories on seat belts Devices claiming
348. to see if the water pump drive belt is missing If it is not missing check to see that it is tight If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory check for coolant leaking from the radiator hoses or under the vehicle If the air conditioning had been in use it is nor mal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized KIA dealer for assistance 6 If you cannot find the cause of the overheating wait until the engine tem perature has returned to normal Then if coolant has been lost carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark 7 Proceed with caution keeping alert for further signs of overheating If over heating happens again call an author ized KIA dealer for assistance CAUTION Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer What to do in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS OHM068030N 7 OHM068031N 1 TPMS malfunction indicator 2 Low tire pressure telltale FO60000AUN Each tire including the spare if pro vided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac ard or tire inflation
349. trying to move forward and backward without using the lever If the seat moves it is not locked properly Safety features of your vehicle OHM038003 C010102AHM Seatback angle To recline the seatback 1 Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever 2 Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire 3 Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock OHM038004 C010103AHM Seat cushion height for driver s seat To change the height of the seat cushion push the lever upwards or downwards e To lower the seat cushion push the lever down several times e To raise the seat cushion pull the lever up several times OHM038048N C010104AHM Headrest The driver s and front passenger s seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant s safety and comfort The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision See ee ee eel Safety features of your vehicle OHM038005 Forward and backward adjustment The headrest may be adjusted forward to 3 different positions by pulling the head rest forward to the desired detent To adjust the headrest to it s furthest back wards position pull it fully forward to the farthest position and release it Adjust the headre
350. turned off when the headlight switch is turned off CAUTION If the rescue mode occurs have your vehicle checked by an author ized KIA dealer as soon as possi ble Features of your vehicle OHM048064L D190400AUN Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position To operate the lights turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the fol lowing positions 1 OFF position 2 Parking light position 3 Headlight position 4 Auto light position if equipped OHM048065L D190401AHM Parking light position 00 When the light switch is in the parking light position 1st position the tail license and instrument panel lights will turn ON OHM048066L D190402AHM Headlight position 20 When the light switch is in the headlight position 2nd position the head tail license and instrument panel lights will turn ON x NOTICE The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights Features of your vehicle D190403AHM Auto light position if equipped When the light switch is in the AUTO light position the taillights and headlights will turn ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehi cle CAUTION Never place anything over sensor 1 located on the instrument panel This will ensure better auto light system control Don t clean the sensor using a window cleaner The cleaner may leave a light fi
351. ty drive are recog nized by car audio Devices such as MP3 Player Cellular phone Digital camera those are not recognizable by standard USB I F can be unrecog nizable USB devices other than standard ized goods METAL COVER TYPE USB can be unrecognizable USB flash memory reader such as CF SD microSD etc or exter nal HDD type devices can be unrecognizable Music files protected by DRM DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT are not recognizalbe The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this AUDIO It is recommeded to back up impor tant data on a personal storage device Continued products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack Please make certain only to use plug type connector products as shown below Ap A Features of your vehicle USB MEMORY AUX iPod WITH BLUETOOTH E Type A 1 RANDOM Play Button CTZ mpa sinus QBlvetooth 2 Automatic Track Selection Button 3 REPEAT Play Button co 4 USB AUX iPod Selection Button AUX USB 4 5 INFORMATION Button 6 File Search Knob and ENTER Button 6 7 FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button a f a 8 SCAN Selection Button PA910HMU CDP iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc Se Features of your vehicle E Type B 1 RANDOM Play Button Okeetooth Gdisc 2 Automatic Track Selection Button d 3 REPEAT Play Button oD 4 USB AUX iPod Selection Button pe 5 NFORMATION B
352. uel engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring Do not forget to check both the engine coolant and engine oil Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating the engine E110700AHM Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire fail ure x NOTICE Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires Driving your vehicle WINTER DRIVING p E120000ASA Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other prob lems To minimize the problems of winter driving you should follow these sugges tions E120100AUN EC Snowy or icy conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow it may be necessary to use snow tires If snow tires are needed it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and han dling of your vehicle Furthermore speeding rapid acceleration sudden brake applications and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices During deceleration use engine braking to the fullest extent Sudden brake appli cations on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur You need to keep suffi cient distance
353. uld OHM048052 D150206BHM EU D150204BHM EE Fuel gauge o cause the engine to misfire damag o Tr sila Py The fuel gauge indicates the approxi ing catalytic converter rip computer i equippe mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel ECO ON OFF mode if equipped tank The fuel tank capacity is given in sec The trip computer is a microcomputer tion 8 The fuel gauge is supplemented by controlled driver information system that a low fuel warning light which will illumi displays information related to driving nate when the fuel tank is nearly empty uel as odometer etal a to On inclines or curves the fuel gauge empty average speed ariving time aver pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel age fuel eae mo ra warning light may come on earlier than consumption on the display when the usual due to the movement of fuel in the ignition switch is in the ON position All tank stored driving information except odometer distance to empty and instant fuel consumption is reseted if the bat tery is disconnected R Features of your vehicle The odometer is always displayed until the display is turned off Press the TRIP button for less than 1 second to select tripmeter distance to empty average speed driving time aver age fuel consumption or instant fuel con sumption function as follows Tripmeter A y Tripmeter B Distance to empty RANGE Average speed AVG Elapsed time E T Av
354. ums Songs T Sena Features of your vehicle IPod to AUDIO Buttons It is displayed once at the beginning of iPod mode NOTICE Using iPod device e Some iPod models might not support the communication protocol and the files will not be played e The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be different from the order searched in the audio system e If the iPod crashes due to its own trouble reset the iPod Reset Refer to iPod manual e iPod may not operate normally on low battery Continued e When connecting the device with an iPod cable push in the jack fully so as to not cause interfere with communication When adjusting the sound effects of an iPod and the audio system the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound Deactivate turn off the equalizer function of an iPod when adjust ing the audio system s volume and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod When the iPod cable is connected the system can be switched to the AUX mode even without the iPod device and can cause noise FILE DOWN CAUTION IN USING iPod DEVICE e You need the power cable exclu ROTATE ENCODER sive for an iPod in order to oper ate an iPod with the buttons on the audio system Connection through standard iPod USB cable is not supported so do not use it with car audio Continued Disconnect the
355. un roof do the following 1 In case the sunroof is closed com pletely or tilted Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof tilts com pletely upward 2 In case the sunroof is open Push the sunroof control lever for ward until the sunroof closes com pletely Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof tilts completely upward 3 Release the sunroof control lever 4 Push the sunroof control lever upward for about 10 seconds until the sun roof has returned to the original tilt position after it is raised a little higher than the maximum tilt position Then release the lever 5 Push the sunroof control lever upward for about 6 seconds until the sunroof operates as follows TILT DOWN gt SLIDE OPEN gt SLIDE CLOSE Then release the lever When this is complete the sunroof sys tem has been reset Features of your vehicle DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED A D120000AHM A driver position memory system is pro vided to store and recall the driver seat Outside rearview mirror and steering wheel positions with a simple button operation By saving the desired positions into the system memory different drivers can reposition the driver seat outside rearview mirror and steering wheel based upon their driving preference If the bat tery is disconnected the position memo ry will be lost and the driving positions should be restored in the system x NOTICE
356. ur vehicle 6 NOTICE In sports mode the driver must exe cute upshifts in accordance with road conditions Be cautious to keep the engine speed below the red zone In sports mode only the 5 or 6 for ward gears can be selected To reverse or park the vehicle move the shift lever to the R Reverse or P Park position as required In sports mode downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down When the vehicle stops Ist gear is automatically selected In sports mode when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the shift lever is oper ated When driving on a slippery road push the shift lever forward into the up position This causes the trans mission to shift into the 2nd or 3rd gear which is better for smooth driv ing on a slippery road Push the shift lever to the down side to shift back to the Ist gear E060102AHM Shift lock system if equipped For your safety the automatic transmis sion has a shift lock system which pre vents shifting the transmission from P Park or N Neutral into R Reverse unless the brake pedal is depressed To shift the transmission from P Park or N Neutral into R Reverse 1 Depress and hold the brake pedal 2 Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON positi
357. ur vehicle Air conditioning system operation tips e If the vehicle has been parked in direct x NOTICE e When using the air conditioning sys tem you may notice clear water drip e When using the air conditioning sys tem monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside tempera tures are high Air conditioning sys tem operation may cause engine over heating Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning sys tem off if the temperature gauge indi cates engine overheating When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed sunlight during hot weather open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days decrease the humidity inside the vehi cle by operating the air conditioning system During air conditioning system opera tion you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles This is a normal system operation characteristic Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance ping or even puddling on the ground under the passenger side of the vehi cle This is a no
358. ure it operates properly x NOTICE To sound the horn press the area indi cated by the horn symbol on your steer ing wheel see illustration The horn will operate only when this area is pressed A CAUTION Do not strike the horn severely to operate it or hit it with your fist Do not press on the horn with a sharp pointed object Features of your vehicle MIRRORS D140100AHM Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen Make this adjustment before you start driving Day 4p OHM048037 D140101AHM Day night rearview mirror Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day night lever is in the day position Pull the day night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driv ing Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position D140102AHM EE Electric chromic mirror ECM if equipped The electric rearview mirror automatical ly controls the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions The sensor mounted in the mirror senses the light level around the vehicle and automati cally controls the headlight glare from the vehicles behind you When the engine is running the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse R
359. ures of your vehicle CDC rear DVDP mode Starting CDC DVDP mode by use of Rear panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display the MODE selection screen 2 lf the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the cursor will highlight the button of the most recently operat ed mode EX The most recent RADIO FM mode 3 While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the cursor to CDC DVDP mode and press the joystick key 4 If the CDC mode is selected the DISC selection screen displaying the No 1 6 DISC will display If the DVDP mode is selected the DISC already inserted in the DVD PLAYER will begin playing 5 When in CDC mode use the 4 direction joystick to move to the select area of the desired DISC and press ENTER to begin playing Starting CDC DVDP mode by use of Rear remote control 1 When operating a different mode pressing the DISC key on the Rear Remote Control will display the most recently operated mode between CDC mode and DVDP mode In addition pressing the DISC key will change the mode in CDC DVDP CDC order 2 When in CDC mode use the 4 direc tion joystick on the REAR panel to move the cursor to the desired track of the Disc and press the select button on the remote control to begin playing NOTICE If there are no discs already inserted in the CD Changer or the DVD player pressing the
360. urn over or turns over slowly 1 If your car has an automatic transmis sion be sure the shift lever is in N Neutral or P Park and the emer gency brake is set 2 Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight 3 Turn on the interior light If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter the battery is discharged 4 Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened 5 Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it See instructions for Jump starting FO30200AHM If engine turns over normally but does not start 1 Check the fuel level 2 With the ignition switch in the LOCK position check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs Reconnect any that may be discon nected or loose 3 Check the fuel line in the engine com partment 4 If the engine still does not start call an authorized KIA dealer or seek other qualified assistance Se ae ee eee What to do in an emergency EMERGENCY STARTING Jumper Cables V F040100AHM Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly Therefore to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery follow the jump starting proce dures If in doubt we strongly recom mend that you have a competent techni 9 cian or towing service jump start your Discharged vehicle bi battery battery A di Se 1v0M001 J CAUTION FO4O0000AUN Use only a 12 vo
361. urrent list is in will be displayed 11 Selected LIST display The currently selected LIST is displayed 12 LIST The folders and files in the current folder are displayed 13 HOME button When having moved to a list which does not display the currently playing file pressing this button will return to the LIST screen of the currently playing file This button is inactive when the dis played LIST includes the currently play ing file 14 PARENT folder button Moves to the Parent Folder 15 ROOT folder button Moves to the Root Folder NOTICE The detail information will only be dis played when such information has been recorded in the ID3 tag of the MP3 file Features of your vehicle Selecting a track with the Remote Control amp Searching playing track 1 Press the SEEK TRACK UP DOWN VCD mode Starting VCD mode by use of Rear remote control Starting VCD mode by use of Rear 1 When operating a different mode panel 1 Press the MODE button on the REAR panel to display the MODE selection screen lf the key on the joystick located at the far right side of the REAR panel is moved in any direction the select area will become displayed on the button of the most recently operated mode While in mode selection screen use the 4 direction keys on the REAR panel to move the select area to DVDP mode If the joystick key is pressed the VCD already inserted in the DVD PLAYER will begin playin
362. uthorized KIA dealer Three kinds of fuses are used blade type for lower amperage rating cartridge type and fusible link for higher amperage rat ings CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system Maintenance G210100AHM Inner panel fuse replacement 1 Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off 2 Open the fuse panel cover a Wa OHM078022 3 Pull the suspected fuse straight out Use the removal tool provided in the main fuse box in the engine compart ment 4 Check the removed fuse replace it if it is blown Spare fuses are provided in the instru ment panel fuse panel or in the engine compartment fuse panel 5 Push in a new fuse of the same rating and make sure it fits tightly in the clips If it fits loosely consult an authorized KIA dealer If you do not have a spare use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle such as the cigarette lighter fuse If the headlights or other electrical com ponents do not work and the fuses are OK check the fuse panel in the engine compartment If a fuse is blown it must be replaced Maintenance x NOTICE e If the memory fuse is pulled out from the fuse panel the warning chime audio clock and interior lamps etc will not operate Some items must be reset after replacement Refer to
363. utton a AO B 6 File Search Knob and ENTER Button car 7 FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button a 8 SCAN Selection Button PA960HMU CDC Features of your vehicle E Type C o_o RANDOM Play Button Automatic Track Selection Button REPEAT Play Button USB AUX iPod Selection Button INFORMATION Button File Search Knob and ENTER Button FOLDER CATEGORY Search Button SCAN Selection Button CD AUX A CAT FOLDER w CO N O OF A W PD PA965HMU CDC_RSE Se T T Features of your vehicle How to Activate USB MEMORY 1 RANDOM Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RDM mode and more than 0 8 second to activate ALL RDM mode e RDM Only files in a folder are played back in random sequence e ALL RDM All files ina USB memory are played back in random sequence 2 Automatic Track Selection Button e Press TRACK V to return to the beginning of the current file Press again within 1 second to return the previous file e Press and hold TRACK V to initiate rewind search Press SEEK for less than 0 8 sec ond to advance the next file Press and hold SEEK A to initiate fast forward search 3 REPEAT Play Button Press this button for less than 0 8 second to activate RPT mode and more than 0 8 second to activate FLD RPT mode e RPT Only a file is played repeatedly e FLD RPT Only files in a folder are played repeatedly 4 USB
364. utton on the remote control is pressed while the Rear system is operating the Rear AV system will stop operation and turn off Methods of RSE System Operation 1 The Rear system is operated by using the 4 direction and ENTER key on the Rear panel 4 dreiction key and ENTER key on the remote control and the Back key Operating the REAR System 1 Press a button on the remote control to display a select area 2 lf the 4 direction key button on the remote control is pressed the select area will move in the direction of the pressed button Move to the desired direction and press the select key on the remote control to select the current button 3 If there are no operations for 10 sec onds the select area will disappear Re pressing one of the 4 direction keys will re create the select area NOTICE The 4 direction and ENT keys on the REAR panel and the 4 direction and ENT keys on the Remote control are used to conduct the same functions Adjusting the Screen Settings for the RSE REAR System Adjusting the Video Screen Quality 1 Press the DISP button on the REAR panel or the Remote Control to display the semi transparent video mode screen setting menu on the screen 2 The 4 direction keys on the REAR panel or the Remote Control can be used to make adjustments to the brightness saturation color contrast day night modes auto light screen ratio etc Features of your vehicle Adjusting the Non V
365. vehicle set the transfer shift knob to 2H 4 Release the parking brake N CAUTION Failure to place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral and the transfer shift knob for part time 4WD operation to 2H may cause internal damage to the transmis sion e a OHM068013N F080300AHM EU Emergency towing If towing is necessary we recommend you to have it done by an authorized KIA dealer or a commercial tow truck service If towing service is not available in an emergency your vehicle may be tem porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front of the vehicle Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes Towing in this manner may be done only on hard surfaced roads for a short dis tance and at low speeds Also the wheels axles power train steering and brakes must all be in good condition e Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi cle out of mud sand or other condi tions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power e Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing e The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequent ly See ee Seed What to do in an emergenc J CAUTION e Attach a towing strap to the tow hook e Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for tow ing may damage the body of your vehicle Onl
366. vince the requirements for towing trailers cars or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ Ask an authorized KIA dealer for further details before tow Ing A CAUTION Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by your warranty To pull a trailer correctly follow the advice in this section Your vehicle can tow a trailer To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle you should read the infor mation in Weight of the trailer that appears later in this section Remember that trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling durability and fuel economy Successful safe trailering requires correct equip ment and it has to be used properly This section contains many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers Please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer Load pulling components such as the engine transmission wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the load of the added weight The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads This additional burden generates extra heat The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance increasing the pulling requirements Driving your vehicle E140100ASA Hitches It s
367. w the belt to retract but not to extend Automatic Locking Retractor Type Refer to Using a child restraint system in this section x NOTICE Although the combination retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes it is recom mended that seated passengers use the emergency locking feature for improved convenience The automatic locking function is intended to facilitate child restraint installation To convert from the automatic locking feature to the emergency locking operation mode allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract See eee ee cil Safety features of your vehicle CAUTION Do NOT fold down the left portion of the second row seat back when the second row center seat belt is buck led ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the sec ond row center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the second row seat back If the second row center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the second row seat back is folded down dis tortion and damage to the top por i OHM038028N tion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may result causing the seat back to lock into the folded down position 1 B210A01NF 1 When using the rear center seat belt the To release the seat belt buckle with the CENTER mark must be The seat belt is released by pressing the used release button 1 in the locking buckle When it is released the belt s
368. wer window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature the automatic window reversal will not operate x NOTICE The automatic reverse feature for the driver s window is only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway posi tion on the power window switch Features of your vehicle CAUTION e To prevent possible damage to the power window system do not open or close two windows or more at the same time This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse Never try to operate the main switch on the driver s door and the individual door window N switch in the opposing directions i OHM048018N at the same time If this is done D080104AHM the window will stop and cannot Power window lock button be opened or closed The driver can disable the power win dow switches on the passenger doors by pressing the power window lock but ton located on the driver s door to the LOCK position pressed When the power window lock button is in the LOCK position pressed the driver s master control cannot operate the passenger door power windows Features of your vehicle D090100AHM Opening the hood 1 Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood The hood should pop open slightly OHM048020 2 Go t
369. when the ESC has malfunctioned back by operating the brakes automati cally for about 2 seconds The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds Driving your vehicle E070506AHM EU Downhill brake control DBC if equipped The Downhill Brake Control DBC sup ports the driver come down a steep hill without the driver depressing the brake pedal It slows down the vehicle under 8 km h 5 mph and lets the driver concen trate on steering the vehicle Mode Standby illuminated yellow Activated Temporarily deactivated illuminated yellow OFF not illuminated Indicator light Type A Type B illuminated white illuminated yellow illuminated white not illuminated Description Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under 40 km h 25 mph The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode The system does not turn ON if the vehicle speed is over 40km h 25 mph In the standby mode if the vehicle speed is under 35 km h 22 mph while driving down a steep hill the DBC will activate automatically In the activated mode the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions e The hill is not steep enough e The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed If the above conditions are gone the DBC will automatically activate again The DBC will turn OFF under the following con ditions e The DBC button
370. with the ignition switch in the ON position the light stays on continuously e ON The light stays on at all times SSS OHM048079 Type B The light will turn on and off according to the switch position e DOOR The light comes on when any door or tailgate is opened regardless of the ignition switch position When doors are unlocked by the transmit ter the light comes on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened The light goes out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed Features of your vehicle However if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked the light will turn off immediate ly If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position the light stays on for about 20 minutes However if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position the light stays on continuously e ON The light stays on at all times e OFF The light stays off at all times Features of your vehicle D210300AHM D210400AEN D210500AUN Luggage lamp if equipped Door courtesy lamp Glove box lamp if equipped DR The light comes on when the tail if equipped The glove box lamp comes on when the gate is opened The door courtesy lamp comes ON when glove box is opened e OFF The light stays off at all times the door is opened to assist entering or The parking lights or headlights must be exiting the vehicle It also serves as a ON for
371. wrong with the audio equipment In such a case use the cellu lar phone at a place as far as possible Station 2 Fading As your vehicle moves away from the radio station the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade When this occurs we suggest that you select another stronger station Flutter Static Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the trans mitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering nois es to occur Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the distur bance clears JBM005 Station Swapping As a FM signal weakens another more powerful sig nal near the same frequency may begin to play This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clear est signal If this occurs select anoth er station with a stronger signal Multi Path Cancellation Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering This can be caused by a direct and reflect ed signal from the same station or by signals from two stations with close frequencies If this occurs select another station until the condition has passed from the audio equipment J CAUTION When using a communication sys tem such a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle a separate external antenna must be fitted When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone it may interfere with the vehi cle s electrical system and
372. y use a cable or chain specifi cally intended for use in towing vehicles Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided OHM068019 e Use a towing strap less than 5 m 16 feet long Attach a white or red cloth about 30 cm 12 inches wide in the middle of the strap for easy visibility e Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loose during towing Before emergency towing check that the hook is not broken or damaged Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook Do not jerk the hook Apply it steadily and with even force To avoid damaging the hook do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle Always pull straight ahead What to do in an emergency F080301AHM EU Emergency towing precautions Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn t locked Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral Release the parking bake Press the brake pedal with more force than usual since you will have reduced brake performance More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled If you are driving down a long hill the brakes may overheat and brake per formance will be reduced Stop often and let the brakes cool off N CAUTION Automatic transmission e If the vehicle is being towed with all four wheels on the ground it can be towed only from the front Be sure that the transmission is in neutral Do not tow at speeds gr
373. ype B e Move the lever down to SET and hold it Your vehicle will gradually slow down Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain Move the lever down to SET and release it immediately The cruising speed will decrease by 1 6 km h 1 0 mph each time the lever is operated in this manner E0O90400AUN To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on depress the accelerator pedal Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed To return to the set speed take your foot off the accelerator OHM059050 E090500AHM EU To cancel cruise control do one of the following e Press the brake pedal e Shift into N Neutral with an automatic transmission e Push the CANCEL switch located on the steering wheel e Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by 15 km h 9 mph Driving your vehicle e Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 40 km h 25 mph Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off but it will not turn the system off If you wish to resume cruise control operation push the RES switch located on your steer ing wheel You will return to your previ ously preset speed E Type A E090600BHM EU To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 40 km h 25 mph

2010 Borrego Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents